SNE-60 - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels- Samsung
SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM
- Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung
- Revenir à l'accueil
src="http://images.samsung.com/is/image/samsung/sec_LD06ESWPWA_001_Front?$M-Thumbnail$" alt="" />
PDF :
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201006/20100604142703171/SNE-60K_UM_Embedded_KOR_100526.pdf
Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels
Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels
Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels
SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels
Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels
Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels
Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels
Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels
Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels
Samsung-910MP-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels
Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels
Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels
Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels
Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels
Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels
Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels
Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels
Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels
Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels
Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels
Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels
Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels
Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel
Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels
Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels
Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels
Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels
Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels
Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels
Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels
Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels
Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels
Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels
Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels
Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels
Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels
Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels
17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels
40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels
CLX-3185FW Manuels
Galaxy Ace GT-S5830
Galaxy S II GT-I9100
Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16
Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16
Galaxy YGT-S5360
LE32C350 LE32C350D1W
LE40C630 LE40C630K1W
MM-C330D
MM-D330D
Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels
N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels
N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels
RSH5UEPN
SGH-F490
Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000
Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000
Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels
T23A550 T23A550
UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS
UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels
Wave 575 GT-S5750E
Wave II GT-S8530
16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung
16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung
samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels
Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels
PRODUITS SAMSUNG : |
Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S |
Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide |
Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S |
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 |
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets |
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes |
Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S |
Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360° |
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung |
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung |
Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung |
Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab |
Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir |
Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800 |
G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100 |
Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet |
Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab |
Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir |
Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB |
Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830 |
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes |
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes |
Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique) |
Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire |
Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace |
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire |
Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir |
Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note |
Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire |
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret |
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830 |
Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830 |
Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100 |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA |
QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 |
QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED |
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste |
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD |
Samsung B5722 Double SIM |
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles |
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310 |
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB |
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E |
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST |
Samsung batterie SLB-10A |
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS |
Samsung BD-E5300 |
Samsung BD-E5500 3D |
Samsung BD-E6100 3D |
Samsung BD-E8300 3D |
Samsung BD-ES5000 |
Samsung BD-ES6000 3D |
Samsung C3050 Stratus |
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1" |
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung |
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100 |
Samsung CB20A12 |
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir |
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB |
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir |
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB |
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir |
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir |
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet |
Samsung CLP-C300A |
Samsung CLP-K300A |
Samsung CLP-M300A |
Samsung CLP-Y300A |
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi |
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0 |
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet |
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet |
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire |
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series |
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX |
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome |
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170 |
Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 |
Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile |
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel |
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose |
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi |
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui |
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi |
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui |
Samsung E1150 - Silver |
Samsung ES90 Noir |
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir |
Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir |
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir |
Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S |
Samsung EX1 |
Samsung Flash SEF15A |
Samsung Flash SEF20A |
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android) |
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android) |
Samsung Galaxy Note |
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc |
Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue |
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc |
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir |
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre |
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet |
Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi |
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android) |
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android) |
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir |
Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB |
Samsung HMX-F80 Noir |
Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir |
Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir |
Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go |
Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go |
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" |
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9" |
Samsung HT-D330 |
Samsung HT-D350 |
Samsung HT-D4500 |
Samsung HT-D5000 3D |
Samsung HT-E4200 3D |
Samsung HT-E4500 3D |
Samsung HT-E5200 3D |
Samsung HT-E5530 3D |
Samsung HT-ES4200 3D |
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D |
Samsung HT-ES8200 3D |
Samsung HW-E350 |
Samsung HW-E450 |
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android) |
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1" |
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX |
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220 |
Samsung kit HDMI |
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm |
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm |
Samsung LE32E420 |
Samsung LE40D503 |
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500 |
Samsung ML-2010D3 |
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome |
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi |
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome |
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi |
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet |
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome |
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi |
Samsung MLT-D1052S |
Samsung MLT-D1082S |
Samsung MLT-D1092S |
Samsung MM-D430D |
Samsung MM-E320 |
Samsung MV800 Noir |
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir |
Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED |
Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED |
Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED |
Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS |
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8 |
Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200 |
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100 |
Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go |
Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go |
Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED |
Samsung PL210 Noir |
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go |
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal |
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante |
Samsung PS43E450 |
Samsung PS43E490 3D |
Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
Samsung PS51E450 |
Samsung PS51E490 3D |
Samsung PS51E530 |
Samsung Q3 noir 4 Go |
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go |
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED |
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes |
Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display |
Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED |
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED |
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D |
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED |
Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED |
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED |
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED |
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions |
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet |
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions |
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi |
Samsung SCX-4200A |
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi |
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0 |
Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0 |
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50 |
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000 |
Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi |
Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi |
Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi |
Samsung ST65 Noir |
Samsung ST65 Rouge |
Samsung ST66 Noir |
Samsung ST77 Blanc |
Samsung ST77 Noir |
Samsung ST77 Rouge |
Samsung ST77 Violet |
Samsung ST88 Noir |
Samsung station d'accueil |
Samsung station d'accueil HD2 |
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9" |
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR |
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED |
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED |
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D |
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD |
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX |
Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD |
Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD |
Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD |
Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD |
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir |
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED |
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED |
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED |
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED |
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED |
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED |
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED |
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED |
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D |
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc |
Samsung UE37ES5500 LED |
Samsung UE40D5000 LED |
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D |
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED |
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED |
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D |
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D |
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED |
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED |
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D |
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc |
Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D |
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D |
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D |
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil |
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium |
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir |
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise |
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron |
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose |
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10 |
Samsung Wave 575 |
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi |
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi |
Samsung WB690 Noir |
Samsung WB700 Noir |
Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS |
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale |
Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD |
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go |
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go |
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go |
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose |
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go |
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go |
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go |
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go |
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go |
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go |
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go |
Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX |
Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX |
Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX |
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go |
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir |
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go |
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go |
T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York |
Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan |
Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan |
Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir |
Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir |
Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta |
Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta |
Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners |
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune |
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune |
Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir |
We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0 |
We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0 |
Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche |
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire |
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire |
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc |
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir
Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U
Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B
SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung E2550
Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur
Samsung ES30 Noir
Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D423
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE40D550
Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir
Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB
SAMSUNG ME106V-SX
Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction
SAMSUNG ME82V-SX
SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S
Samsung PL170 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43D450
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS59D530
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SC4340 noir ébène
Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19D4010 LED
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32D5000 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D5710 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB750 Noir
Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
사용설명서
삼성 지펠 냉장고
Side by Side type Refrigerator
본 제품은 대한민국에서만 사용하도록 만들어져 있으며,
해외에서는 품질을 보증하지 않습니다.
(FOR KOREA UNIT STANDARD ONLY)
안전을 위한 주의 사항은 사용자의 안전을 지키고, 재산상의 손해 등을
막기 위한 내용입니다. 반드시 읽고 올바르게 사용해 주세요.
권장안전사용기간 7년
안전사용기간을 초과하여 사용하면 제품 노후로 인하여 화재 및 부상
등을 초래할 수 있습니다. 반드시 안전점검을 받도록 하십시오.
DA68-01829P (REV 0.0)
RS75EEALC**Side by Side type Refrigerator
본 제품은 AC 220 V / 60 Hz 전용입니다.
용량에 맞지 않는 전압 사용은 냉장고 고장의 원인이 됩니다.
누설 전류로 인한 감전 사고를 막기 위해, 반드시 접지해 주세요.
새로운 독립냉각 방식
편리한 접이식 선반
많은 양도 넉넉하게,
더욱 넓어진 냉동/냉장 빅 박스
홈바 채용
▶ 2개의 냉각기가 냉장실과 냉동실을 각각 독립적으로
냉각시켜 신선함은 높이고, 전기료는 낮추는 혁신적인
냉각 방식입니다. 지펠의 독립냉각 방식은 마츠시다,
도시바 등의 세계 우수의 업체들이 사용하고 있습니다.
▶ 냉장실의 선반이 반으로 접혀 큰 냄비나 솥째
간편하게 보관하면서, 나머지 공간을 효율적으로
활용할 수 있습니다.
▶ 냉동/냉장실 하단에 빅 박스를 채용하여 기존 대비
공간을 대폭 확장하여 많은 양의 냉동식품 및
야채와 과일 등을 보관할 수 있습니다.
▶ 불필요한 걸림쇠를 제거하여 안전하고 튼튼한
새로운 홈바를 구현하였습니다.3
Side by Side type Refrigerator
기타편
안전을 위한 경고 및 주의 사항 / 그밖의 주의 사항
각 부분의 이름
설치 전 주의 사항
냉장고문 분해 / 조립
냉장고 수평 조절 및 냉장고문 높이 조절 방법
4
12
13
14
16
사용 전 확인 사항
버튼과 표시부
식품 보관 방법
온도 조절 방법
식품별 명당자리 찾기 <냉장고 풍수지리>
18
19
20
22
24
생활의 지혜
청소 및 손질 방법
고장신고 전 확인 사항
냉장고 사용에 필요한 공간
폐가전 처리안내
제품 보증서
25
27
30
33
34
사용편
준비편4
준비편
전원은 교류 220 V / 60 Hz / 정격 15 A 이상의 콘센트를
제품 단독으로 사용하세요.
또한, 전원코드의 길이를 임의로 연장하지 마세요.
▶ 멀티탭이나 다른 기기와 병행 및 전원코드를 연장하여 사용하는 경우,
감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
▶ 변압기를 사용하는 경우, 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
▶ 전압/주파수/정격 전류 조건이 다르면 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
안전을 위해 반드시 접지하세요. 또한, 가스관 및
플라스틱 수도관, 전화선 등에는 접지하지 마세요.
▶ 감전, 화재, 고장, 폭발의 위험이 있습니다.
▶ 반드시 접지가 있는 콘센트를 사용하세요.
설치는 전문기사에게 의뢰하세요.
▶ 감전, 화재, 고장, 폭발, 상해의 원인이 됩니다.
안전을 위한 경고 및 주의 사항 - 설치 관련
지키지 않았을 경우 사용자가 사망하거나 중상을 입을 수 있습니다.
지키지 않았을 경우 사용자가 부상을 당하거나
재산상의 손해를 입을 수 있습니다.
강제 지시 표시로 꼭 따라야 할 항목을 참조하여 나타냅니다.
행위 금지 표시로 하지 말아야 할 항목을 강조하여 나타냅니다.
감전예방을 위한 접지 표시입니다.
전원을 차단하라는 표시입니다.
분해금지 표시입니다.5
준비편
열기구 및 열에 약한 물건 근처나 습기, 기름, 먼지가 많은 곳,
직사광선 및 물(빗물 등)이 닿는 곳,
혹은 가스가 샐 가능성이 있는 곳에 설치하지 마세요.
▶ 감전, 화재, 고장, 폭발의 위험이 있습니다.
▶ 반드시 접지가 있는 콘센트를 사용하세요.
제품을 설치할 때는 전원코드를 빼기 쉬운 곳에 설치하세요.
▶ 누전에 의한 감전 및 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
바닥이 튼튼하고 수평인 곳에 설치하세요.
▶ 이상 진동 및 소음, 고장의 원인이 됩니다.
정기적으로 전원플러그의 단자 및 접촉 부분에
이물(먼지, 물 등)을 마른 천으로 잘 닦아 주세요.
▶ 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
▶ 젖은 헝겊으로는 닦지 마세요.
안전을 위한 경고 및 주의 사항 - 전원 관련
전원플러그는 콘센트 끝까지 확실히 연결하고,
손상된 전원플러그, 전원코드, 느슨해진 콘센트는
사용하지 마세요.
▶ 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.6
준비편
젖은 손으로 전원플러그를 만지지 마세요.
▶ 감전의 원인이 됩니다.
전원플러그를 뺄 때는 전원코드(전선)를 당겨서 빼지 마세요.
▶ 전원플러그를 잡고 빼 주세요.
▶ 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
전원플러그는 코드가 아래를 향하도록 연결하세요.
▶ 반대로 연결할 경우, 코드 내부에서 선이 끊어져
화재 및 감전의 원인이 됩니다.
전원코드나 전원플러그가 파손된 경우에는 위험이 생기지 않도록 하기 위하여 제조자나
그 서비스 대행점 또는 유자격기술자에 의해 교환하세요.
장시간 사용하지 않거나, 천둥 및 번개가 칠 경우에는
전원플러그를 빼 주세요.
▶ 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
전원코드를 무리하게 구부리거나 잡아당기거나, 비틀거나
묶지 마세요. 또한 금속부에 걸거나 무거운 물체를 올려 놓거나,
사이에 끼우거나 제품 뒤쪽으로 밀어 넣지 마세요.
▶ 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
안전을 위한 경고 및 주의 사항 - 사용 관련
안전을 위한 경고 및 주의 사항 - 전원 관련7
준비편
제품이 침수된 경우에는 서비스 센터에 연락하세요.
▶ 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
절대 임의로 분해, 수리, 개조하지 마세요.
▶ 정격 퓨즈 이외의 것(구리, 철사 등)을 사용하지 마세요.
▶ 수리 및 재설치 등이 필요할 때는 서비스 센터로 연락하세요.
▶ 감전, 화재, 고장, 상해의 원인이 됩니다.
제품 내의 전기 부품에 물이나 이물질이 들어간 경우,
전원플러그를 빼고 서비스 센터에 연락하세요.
▶ 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
가스(프로판/도시가스 등)가 샐 때는
제품이나 전원플러그를 만지지 마시고 바로 환기시키세요.
▶ 환기 팬은 사용하지 마세요.
▶ 불꽃을 일으키면 폭발, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
제품에서 이상한 소리나 타는 냄새, 연기가 나면
즉시 전원을 차단하고 서비스 센터에 연락하세요.
▶ 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.8
준비편
제품 위에 올라가거나, 물건(세탁물, 촛불, 담뱃불, 그릇,
약품, 금속 등)을 올려놓지 마세요.
▶ 감전, 화재, 고장이나 상해의 원인이 됩니다.
가연성 스프레이, 불에 잘 타는 물질, 드라이아이스 등과 같은
온도에 민감한 제품, 의약품, 학술재료 등을 제품 가까운 곳에서
사용하거나 보관하지 마세요. 또한 휘발성이 있거나
발화성이 있는 물건이나 물질(벤젠, 시너, 프로판 가스 등),
전기제품 등을 보관하지 마세요.
▶ 화재, 폭발의 원인이 됩니다.
▶ 본 제품은 식품 저장용입니다.
비닐 포장재는 어린이의 손이 닿지 않는 곳에
보관, 또는 폐기하세요.
▶ 머리에 쓰는 행위 등으로 코나 입이 막혀 질식할 수 있습니다.
어린이가 제품 안에 들어가지 못하게 하세요.
또한 폐기 시에는 문의 패킹을 분리하세요.
▶ 어린이가 제품 안으로 들어가면 갇히게 되어 숨질 위험이 있습니다.
파이프(관)에서 냉매가 샐 경우, 불꽃이나
불이 붙을 수 있는 물질 등을 멀리 이동시킨 후 환기하세요.
▶ 화재, 폭발의 원인이 됩니다.
안전을 위한 경고 및 주의 사항 - 사용 관련9
준비편
젖은 손으로 제품을 동작시키지 마세요.
▶ 감전의 원인이 됩니다.
냉장고문이나 홈바에 매달리거나 올라타지 않도록 하세요.
▶ 제품이 쓰러지거나 문이 분리되거나, 문틈(홈바, 냉장고문 등)에
손이나 발 등이 끼이면 상해의 원인이 됩니다.
유리병이나 탄산음료 등을 냉동실에 넣지 마세요.
▶ 내용물이 얼어서 병이 깨지면 다칠 위험이 있습니다.
냉장고 내부 건조를 위해 드라이기를 사용하지 마세요.
또한, 냄새 제거를 위해 촛불 등을 넣지 마세요.
▶ 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
제품에 살충제, 방향제 등의 가연성 스프레이를 뿌리지 마세요.
▶ 인체에 해로울 뿐 아니라 감전, 화재, 고장의 원인이 됩니다.
냉장고 내부 식품을 무질서하게 보관하지 마세요.
▶ 냉각이 잘 되지 않습니다.
홈바를 열 때 주위에 어린이가 접근하지 못하게 하세요.
▶ 홈바에 부딪혀 상해의 원인이 됩니다.10
준비편
제품에 물을 직접 뿌리거나 벤젠, 시너, 알코올 등으로
닦지 마세요.
▶ 누전에 의한 감전 및 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
청소 시에는 전원플러그를 빼세요.
▶ 감전, 화재의 원인이 됩니다.
제품 바닥 및 뒤쪽에 손이나 발, 금속 막대(젓가락 등) 등을
넣지 마세요.
▶ 감전, 상해의 원인이 됩니다.
어린이가 건조/야채실 덮개에 올라서지 못하도록 하세요.
▶ 건조/야채실 덮개가 파손되어 미끄러질 위험이 있습니다.
안전을 위한 경고 및 주의 사항 - 사용 관련
안전을 위한 경고 및 주의 사항 - 청소 관련11
준비편
[기타 주의 사항]
▶ 냉장고의 전원플러그를 뽑았을 때는 5분 정도 지난 후에 다시 꽂아주세요.
▶ 제품에 부착된 구조물은 반드시 유지하여 주세요.
▶ 제조자가 권고하지 않는 기계장치나 제상 시스템(성에를 제거하는 시스템)을 가속화하는
동작은 삼가주십시오. 또한 냉각 시스템에 손상을 주지 마세요.
냉장고 성능에 영향을 미칠 수 있습니다.
▶ 어린이나 인지력이 부족한 사람의 안전한 사용을 위하여 사용 시 감독하여 주세요.
▶ 제상 시의 온도 상승은 국내 냉장고 규격에서 허용하는 범위 이내입니다. 제상 시의
온도 상승으로 인한 식품의 피해를 줄이고자 하는 경우, 냉동실에 저장된 식품을
여러겹으로 싸 주세요.
▶ 포장자재(박스, 스티로폼 등)는 환경친화적인 방법으로 폐기하여 주세요.
[냉매에 대한 주의 사항]
▶ 본 제품의 냉매는 가연성 천연가스인 이소부탄(R-600a)을 사용하였으므로
제품을 이동할 때 손상되지 않도록 주의하여 주세요.
▶ 냉매가 샐 것을 예상하여 발화 가능성을 줄이기 위해, 사용된 냉매의 양에 따라
냉장고 설치를 위한 공간이 필요합니다.(R-600a 8 g당 1 ㎥의 공간 필요)
사용된 냉매의 양은 냉장고 내부 라벨(스티커)에 표기되어 있습니다.
[폐기 시 주의 사항]
▶ 본 제품의 냉매는 가연성 천연가스인 이소부탄(R-600a)을,
단열재는 사이크로펜탄을 사용하였으므로 안전한 처리를 위하여 폐기 시에는
해당 관청이나 동 주민센터에 연락하여 폐기하여 주십시오.
▶ 폐기 시 파이프 등을 훼손하지 마세요.
그밖의 주의 사항
본 제품은 가정용으로만 사용하십시오.
▶ 자격을 갖춘 전문가를 통해 서비스를 받으시기 바랍니다.
▶ 본 내용은 국내 냉장고 규격에 의거하여 기재되었습니다.12
준비편
각 부분의 이름
버튼과 표시부
설정된 기능을 표시해주는 부분
냉장실 홈바
자주 꺼내는 음료수나
식품을 보관하는 부분
냉장실 홈바 손잡이
손잡이
냉동실문
냉장실문
수평 조절다리
냉장고의 수평을
조절하는 부분
문높이차 조절부13
준비편
[운반 및 설치 장소 고르기]
냉장고 안의 식품은 모두 꺼내고, 선반 등의 깨질 위험이 있는
부품과 문의 손잡이는 테이프로 고정시킨 후 운반하세요.
이사 등의 장거리로 운반할 때는 바로 세워서 운반하세요.
▶ 그림과 같이 반드시 2인 1조로 운반하세요. 제품이 무거우므로
다치거나 안전사고가 발생할 수 있습니다.
▶ 설치 및 수리, 청소를 할 경우, 냉장고를 항상 직선방향(앞, 뒤)으로
움직여 주세요. 지그재그로 움직이면 바닥에 손상을 줄 수 있습니다.
바닥이 튼튼하고 평평한 곳에 설치하세요.
▶ 냉장고 설치 시 바닥이 고르지 않으면 진동과 소음발생 및 문의
수평이 맞지 않는 원인이 되며, 문을 여닫을 때 냉장고가 넘어져
다칠 수 있습니다.
▶ 식품이 가득 채워진 냉장고의 무게를 견딜 수 있는
바닥이 단단한 곳이어야 합니다.
주위와 적당한 간격을 유지해서 설치하세요.
▶ 옆면, 뒷면 5 cm, 윗면 10 cm 이상 사이를 두고 설치하세요. 주위와의
간격이 너무 좁으면 통풍이 잘 되지 않아 냉각력이 떨어지며, 제품
외벽에 이슬이 생길 수 있고, 전기료도 많이 나오게 됩니다.
▶ 냉매가 샜을 때 고이게 되어 발화 및 폭발의 원인이 됩니다.
햇볕이 내리쬐는 곳, 열기가 많은 곳, 지나치게 추운 곳은 피해주세요.
▶ 주위 온도가 5 ℃ 이상, 43 ℃ 이하인 곳에 설치하세요.
▶ 설치장소의 온도가 너무 높거나 낮으면 기능에 이상이 발생하거나
냉각력이 떨어지고 전기료가 많이 나오게 됩니다.
[접지하기]
누설 전류로 인한 감전 사고를 막기 위해 반드시 접지해 주세요.
<콘센트에 접지단자가 있는 경우>
▶ 따로 접지할 필요가 없습니다.
<콘센트에 접지단자가 없는 경우>
▶ 접지선을 별도 구입하여 제품뒷면에
연결하여 주세요.
▶ 접지선을 금속 수도관이나 접지선로에
연결하여 주세요.
▶ 가스관, 플라스틱 수도관,
전화선 등에는 접지하지
마세요. 감전, 폭발의
위험이 있습니다.
▶ 제품에 이상이 없어도
접지를 하지 않을 경우,
냉장고문 손잡이 및
측면 모서리를 만질 때
미세한 누설 전류로 인해
전기를 느낄 수 있습니다.
설치 전 주의 사항
접지단자
5 cm 5 cm
윗면
10 cm14
준비편
냉장고문 분해 / 조립 주택 또는 아파트의 현관문보다 냉장고가 큰 경우
이동의 편의를 위한 냉장고문의 분해/조립 방법입니다.
[문 분해하기]
▶ 문 분해 및 조립 시, 전선이 벗겨지지 않도록 주의하세요.
▶ 문이 넘어지지 않도록 주의하세요.
2 십자(+) 드라이버로 덮개의 나사를
푼 다음, 덮개를 앞으로 밀고 위로
올려 분해하세요. (냉장고 상단)
3 전선 콘넥터와 접지 나사를
분리하세요.
4 고정구[A]를 위로 젖힌 후
화살표 방향으로 빼내세요.
5 힌지[B]를 1번 방향으로 젖힌 후,
2번 방향으로 빼내세요.
6 냉장고문을 위로 들어 올려
앞으로 당겨주세요.
7 냉장고 하단의 힌지[A]를 화살표
방향으로 분리하여 주세요.
1 문을 연 상태에서 하단 나사(3개)를
풀고 하단 덮개를 분리하세요.
접지나사
2
1
715
준비편
1 냉장고 하단의 힌지[A]를 화살표 방향으로 삽입하여 주세요.
5 전선 콘넥터와 접지나사를 조립하세요.
4 고정구[A]를 화살표 방향으로 끼워 맞춘 후,
뒷부분을 내려서 고정시켜 주세요.
6 덮개의 앞부분을 먼저 끼운 후 뒷부분을 눌러 닫은 후
십자(+) 드라이버로 고정해 주세요.
[문 조립하기]
▶ 문 조립 시 전선의 연결이 제대로 되지않았을 경우,
표시부에 고장이 나타날 수 있습니다.
2 냉장고문의 구멍을 화살표 방향으로 힌지의 축에 끼워주세요.
(냉장고 하단)
3 냉장고의 상단부 힌지[B]를 고정홈에 끼워 맞춘 후
화살표 방향으로 문의 구멍에 일치시켜 누르세요.16
준비편
냉장고 수평 조절 및 냉장고문 높이 조절 방법
냉장고 설치 시, 바닥면이 고르지 않으면 냉장고문의 높이차가 발생할 수 있습니다.
[수평 조절하기]
▶ 냉장고문이 자동으로 닫힐 수 있도록 냉장고의 앞쪽을 약간 높여 주세요.
조절다리를 이용해서 수평을 맞출 때 냉장고 앞쪽을 뒤쪽보다 너무 높게 조정하면
냉장고문을 열 때 힘이 들 수 있습니다.
▶ 냉장고 뒤쪽 수평이 맞지 않을 때는 냉장고 뒤쪽의 낮은 부분을
딱딱한 물체(책받침, 자 등)로 괸 다음, 테이프로 고정하고 냉장고를 밀어 넣어
수평을 맞추세요.
▶ 냉장고를 밀어 넣을 때 원목 마루 또는 장판이 찍히지 않도록 주의하세요.
냉동실 쪽이 낮을 때는,
▶ 냉동실문 하단 옆부분의 조절다리 홈에 일자(-) 드라이버를
삽입하여 화살표 방향으로 돌려서 수평을 맞추세요.
냉장실 쪽이 낮을 때는,
▶ 냉장실문 하단 옆부분의 조절다리 홈에 일자(-) 드라이버를
삽입하여 화살표 방향으로 돌려서 수평을 맞추세요.17
준비편
냉장고 설치 시, 바닥면이 고르지 않으면 냉장고문의 높이차가 발생할 수 있습니다. 한쪽문이 다른쪽 문에 비해 내려가 있으면,
▶ 문의 높낮이 조절 방법은 냉동/냉장실문(좌/우측), 양쪽이 동일합니다.
▶ 과도하게 높히면 문을 여닫을 때 위쪽에 간섭이 발생합니다.
[높이차 조절하기]
1 냉장/냉동실문 하단부의 볼트에 별도로 포장된 렌치(“ㄱ”공구)를
사용하여 반시계 방향( )으로 조금 회전시켜 볼트와 너트의
조임을 느슨하게 만들어 주세요.
2 너트를 볼트의 끝부분까지 손으로 풀어 주세요.
3 렌치를 이용하여 문을 위로 올리려면 볼트를 시계 방향( )으로
돌리고, 문을 아래로 내리려면 볼트를 반시계 방향( )으로 돌리며
냉동실문과 냉장실문의 높이차를 맞추어 주세요.
4 문의 높이를 맞춘 후 너트를 시계 방향( )으로 끝까지 조여주세요.
5 렌치로 볼트를 한번 더 조여주세요.
▶ 식품을 보관하지 않은 상태에서 높이를 조절하고 사용하면 식품을 보관하였을 때
그 하중에 의해 높이차가 다시 생길 수 있습니다. 이때는 위의 조절 방법으로 다시
조정해 주세요.
렌치
볼트
너트18
사용편
사용 전 확인 사항
냉장고에서 플라스틱 냄새가 날 때
▶ 냉장고문을 열어 환기를 시킨 후 가동시키세요. 냉장고를 처음
설치했을 때는 내부에서 플라스틱 냄새가 날 수 있습니다.
▶ 냄새가 날 수 있는 부착물, 테이프류는 제거한 후 사용하세요.
식품을 처음 보관할 때
▶ 전원플러그를 꽂은 후 2~3시간 정도 지나 냉장고 안이 차가워졌을 때
식품을 넣으세요. 냉장고 내부가 완전히 차가워지기 전에 식품을 넣으면
식품에 냉장고 냄새가 밸 수 있습니다.
▶ 보관된 식품이 완전히 차가워지려면 저장량에 따라 다르지만,
식품이 많을 경우 만 하루가 지나야 합니다.
처음 가동 시 소리가 크게 들릴 때
▶ 구입 후 처음으로 냉장고를 운전할 때는 냉동/냉장실의 온도를
빨리 낮추기 위해 압축기 및 모터가 고속 회전하므로
소리가 크게 들릴 수 있습니다.
길게는 2~3일 후 냉장고 내부 온도가 설정온도에 도달하고 안정되면
소리는 점점 작아집니다.
사용 중 정전이 되었을 때
▶ 냉장고문을 되도록 열지 마세요. 2~3시간 정도는
전기가 들어오지 않아도 식품이 상하지 않습니다.
단, 24시간 이상 정전이 지속될 경우에는
식품이 상할 수 있으니 냉장고 안의 모든 식품을 꺼내주세요.
냉장고 사용 중 경보음이 울릴 때
▶ 냉장고문이 2분이 넘게 15°(도) 이상 열려있는 경우,
매분 10초간 경보음이 울리는 문단속 기능이 작동합니다.
▶ 홈바가 열려 있어도 동일하게 문단속 기능이 작동합니다.19
사용편
버튼과 표시부
▶ 절전을 위해 10초 이상 버튼 조작 및 냉동/냉장실문과 홈바를 열지 않을 경우,
표시부의 아이콘이 자동으로 꺼집니다.
냉동실 온도 p22
냉동실 온도(-25 ℃ ~ -17 ℃사이)를
조절하고 싶을 때 사용하세요.
냉장실 온도 p23
냉장실 온도(0 ℃ ~ 5 ℃사이)를
설정하고 싶을 때 사용하세요.
잠금
잠금을 설정하시려면 버튼을 3초 이상 누르세요. 잠금 아이콘이 켜지며
기능 조작을 할 수 없습니다. 잠금을 해제하려면 버튼을 다시 3초 이상 누르세요.
[홈바 사용 방법]
터치식 홈바는 이렇게 열고 닫습니다.
▶ 홈바를 열 때는 홈바 상단을 “딸깍”소리가 날 때까지 누르면 자동으로 열립니다.
▶ 홈바를 닫을 때는 홈바 상단을 “딸깍”소리가 날 때까지 누르면 닫힙니다.
자주 꺼내는 식품을 넣어 사용하세요.
▶ 냉장고문을 열지 않아도 되므로 전기료가 절약됩니다.
▶ 홈바 문을 열어도 냉장고 실내등이 켜지므로 내용물을 쉽게 확인할 수 있습니다.
물건을 넣고 꺼낼 때 받침대로 사용하세요.
▶ 내용물을 받침대 위에 올려놓고 사용하면 편리합니다.
▶ 홈바가 열리는 속도는 각각의 무게차에 의해 다를 수 있습니다.
▶ 냉장실 내부와 냉장실 홈바 사이의 덮개를 빼지마세요.
▶ 홈바에 무거운 물건을 올려 놓거나 어린이가 매달리지 않게 하세요.
문이 파손되어 다칠 위험이 있습니다.
▶ 홈바를 도마로 사용하거나 날카로운 도구로 긁지 마세요.20
사용편
▶ 젖은 손으로 냉동실의 그릇 및 식품을 만지지 마세요. 동상의 위험이 있습니다.
▶ 냉기가 나오는 곳 너무 가까이 식품이나 용기 등을 놓지 마세요.
저장 온도에 영향을 주어 식품에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다.
▶ 냉동실에 아이스크림 등의 녹기 쉬운 제품을 장기 보관할 때는 제품에 표기된
적정 온도 이하로 설정하여 사용하세요.(일반적으로 아이스크림의 경우는
-20 ℃ 이하에서 보관하도록 표시되어 있습니다)
▶ 냉장고에 저장할 식품은 최대 저장 기간과 유통기한을 확인하고 저장해 주세요.
▶ 완전히 해동된 식품을 다시 얼리지 마세요. 식품의 신선도와 맛이 떨어질 수 있습니다.
▶ 얼음을 얼리실 때는 먹는 물을 사용하세요.
식품 보관 방법
식품은 잘게 나누어 저장하세요.
▶ 음식이 빨리 냉각되므로
전기료를 절약할 수 있습니다.
효과적인 식품 저장 방법
칸마다 보관하기 좋은 식품이 따로 있습니다.
최적의 장소에 보관하여 가장 신선한 맛을 즐겨보세요.
1 냉동실 선반
고기, 생선, 냉동만두, 아이스크림 등
각종 냉동식품을 보관하세요.
5 유제품실
버터 등의 유제품을 보관하세요.
2 얼음 보관 용기
얼음을 보관하세요. 얼음을 사용하지 않을 경우
냉장고 밖으로 빼내어 냉동실을 보다 넓게
사용할 수 있습니다.
3 냉동실 다용도칸
콩 등의 작게 포장된 냉동식품을 보관하세요.
단, 장기간 보관할 식품이나
아이스크림은 넣지 마세요.
4 건조한 식품 및 고기 보관함
장기간 보관할 마른 오징어, 멸치, 고춧가루 등을
넣으시고 고기, 닭고기 등은 호일이나 랩에 싸서
보관하세요.
1
2
4
321
사용편
수분이 많은 식품(두부 등)은
냉장실 선반 앞쪽에 두세요.
▶ 차가운 공기가 나오는 안쪽에 넣으면
식품이 얼 수 있습니다.
편리한 접이식 선반
효과적인 식품 저장 방법
6 냉장실 홈바
음료, 스낵 등의 자주 꺼내는 식품을 보관하세요.
7 접이식 선반
큰 냄비나 솥째 보관 시 선반을 반으로 접어
사용할 수 있습니다
8 솔라파워 탈취기
냉장고에서 나는 불쾌한 냄새를 없애줍니다.
9 계란저장용기
깨지기 쉬운 계란을 안전하게 보관해 줍니다.
10 음료 보관칸
냉장 식품이나 우유, 쥬스, 맥주 등의 음료수를
보관하세요.
11 웰빙 야채실
야채나 과일을 신선하게 보관합니다.
9
10
11
7
5
6
선반 앞부분을 잡고 밑면을 들면서
뒤쪽으로 밀어 넣으십시오.
[1단 사용시]
1단계로 밀어 넣은 상태에서
선반을 위로 회전시켜 뒤쪽으로 밀어
올리십시오. [2단 사용시]
선반을 원래의 위치로 사용하시려면
선반의 앞부분을 잡고 내린 다음
앞으로 당겨 원래의 위치로 놓으십시오.
822
사용편
[냉동실 온도 조절 방법]
[급속냉동 설정 방법]
냉동실의 온도를 조절하고 싶을 때는
다음과 같이 하세요.
▶ [냉동실온도]버튼을 누르면 아래와 같이
온도를 조절할 수 있습니다.
▶ [냉동실온도]버튼을 한 번 씩 누를 때마다,
-20 ℃ → -21 ℃ → -22 ℃ → -23 ℃
→ -24 ℃ → -25 ℃ → 급속냉동
→ -17 ℃ → -18 ℃ → -19 ℃ 로
온도를 조절할 수 있습니다.
급속냉동을 조절하고 싶을 때는
다음과 같이 하세요.
▶ [냉동실온도]버튼을 눌러
아이콘( )이 켜지도록 합니다.
▶ 급속냉동 기능은
일정 시간(72시간/오차범위 1시간)이
지나면 자동으로 꺼지며, 급속냉동이
종료되면 -20 ℃로 동작되므로
필요시 온도를 설정하여 사용하세요.
급속냉동을 취소하려면 [냉동실온도] 버튼을 다시 누르세요.
▶ 급속냉동 아이콘( )이 꺼지면서 급속냉동 기능이 멈춥니다.
▶ 냉동실의 온도는 문을 여는 횟수, 식품의 양, 주위 온도 등에 따라 변할 수 있습니다.
▶ 냉동실 각 저장칸은 위치에 따라 온도가 다릅니다.
▶ 잦은 사용이나 따뜻한 식품의 보관 등으로 냉동실 온도가 상승한 경우에는
온도 표시부가 깜박입니다. 이 경우 정상적인 온도가 되면 깜박임이 멈추지만,
장시간 가동하여도 멈추지 않을 때에는 서비스 센터로 문의하세요.
▶ 버튼이 작동하지 않을 경우 잠금 기능 여부를 확인하세요. 잠금기능이 작동중인
경우에는 잠금 버튼을 3초 이상 눌러 잠금 아이콘이 사라진 다음 온도를 조절하세요.
▶ 많은 양의 음식을 얼려야한다면 하루 전에 급속냉동을 설정하세요.
온도 조절 방법23
사용편
[냉장실 온도 조절 방법] 냉장실의 온도를 조절하고 싶을 때는
다음과 같이 하세요.
▶ [냉장실온도]버튼을 누르면 아래와 같이
온도를 조절할 수 있습니다.
▶ [냉장실온도]버튼을 한 번 씩 누를 때마다,
2 ℃ → 1 ℃ → 0 ℃ → 5 ℃ → 4 ℃
→ 3 ℃로 온도를 조절할 수 있습니다.
▶ 냉장실의 온도는 문을 여는 횟수, 식품의 양, 주위 온도 등에 따라 변할 수 있습니다.
▶ 냉장실의 선반이나 용기는 위치에 따라 온도가 다를 수 있습니다.
▶ 잦은 사용이나 따뜻한 식품의 보관 등으로 냉장실 온도가 상승한 경우에는
온도 표시부가 깜박입니다. 이 경우 정상적인 온도가 되면 깜박임이 멈추지만,
장시간 가동하여도 멈추지 않을 때에는 서비스 센터로 문의하세요.24
사용편
식품별 명당자리 찾기 <냉장고 풍수지리>25
기타편
생활의 지혜
반찬을 보관하려면
뚜껑이 없는 그릇 등에 담긴 반찬은 랩을 씌워서 보관하는 것이 좋습니다.
뜨거운 식품을 저장하려면
식혀서 보관하세요. 냉각 효율이 좋아지며 전기료도 절약할 수 있습니다.
뜨거운 식품 보관시 냉장고 내부에 이슬이나 성에가 생길 수 있습니다.
[냉장고 관리 방법]
[식품 보관 방법]
냉각 효율을 좋게 하려면
약 1년 주기로 냉장고 뒷면의 먼지를 청소하거나, 냉장고 속의 식품을
적당한 간격을 두고 놓아 주세요.
냉기 나오는 곳을 식품 등으로 막으면 냉기가 고루 퍼지지 못해 냉각이
원활히 이루어지지 않게 됩니다. 그로 인해 냉장고 온도가 상승하게 되어
냉각 효율이 떨어질 수 있습니다.
냉장고 정리 정돈하는 법
냉장고의 야채실은 깊어서 자칫하면 야채들이 쌓이고 눌려 물러지기 쉽습니다. 특히, 시금치나 파 등의
잎야채들은 세워서 보관하는 것이 좋습니다. 우유팩의 윗부분을 야채실의 깊이에 맞춰 커터칼이나
가위로 잘라낸 다음, 우유팩 몇 개를 이어서 테이프로 고정시켜 주세요. 여기에 야채를 정리하면
손상도 막을 수 있으며 관리도 쉬워집니다.
비스킷을 바삭바삭하게 보존하려면
밀폐용기에 보존하기도 하지만 보다 간단하고 쉬운 방법은
비스킷을 통에 넣을 때 각설탕 한 개를 같이 넣는 것입니다.
설탕이 습기를 흡수하여 바삭바삭한 상태를 오래 유지할 수 있습니다.
: 냉기 나오는 곳26
기타편
생활의 지혜
마요네즈를 맛있게 보관하려면
마요네즈는 개봉한 다음 상온에서 보관하는 것이 가장 좋습니다.(한여름은 예외)
마요네즈는 고온 뿐 아니라 저온에도 약한 식품으로, 고온일 경우에는
쉽게 상하고, 지나치게 저온이면 주성분인 식초, 기름, 계란 노른자가 분리되어
풍미가 떨어집니다. 따라서 직사광선이나 열기가 닿지 않는 시원한 곳에
보관하는 것이 가장 좋습니다.
또한, 구입한 마요네즈는 반드시 유통기한을 확인하세요.
우유를 진하게 만들려면
우유를 냉동실에 넣어 얼려주세요. 이때 얼리는 양은
0.5 L ~ 1 L정도가 적당합니다. 냉동이 되었으면 꺼내서 반쯤 해동 시켜줍니다.
이 상태는 우유 속 수분이 아직 얼음으로 되어 있기 때문에 수분이 적어져
진한 우유의 맛을 즐길 수 있습니다.
투명하고 깨끗한 얼음을 만들려면
냉장고 제빙실에서 투명한 얼음을 만들고 싶을 때는 물을 끓였다가 식힌 후 얼려주세요.
이렇게 물속의 불순물을 증발시키면 투명하고 깨끗한 얼음을 만들 수 있습니다.
향신료를 냉동, 냉장 보관하려면
향신료는 향이 생명이므로 개봉 후 직사광선이 닿지 않는 건조한 장소에 보관해야 합니다.
따라서, 냉동실이나 냉장실은 향신료를 보관하기에 가장 알맞은 곳입니다. 하지만 차가운 향신료는
습기를 빨아들이기 쉽기 때문에, 반드시 사용할 때만 꺼내고, 사용 후에는 빨리 냉동실 혹은 냉장실에
넣어 보관하세요.
꿀이 응고되지 않게 보존하려면
꿀은 냉동실에 보관하세요.
순도가 높은 꿀일수록 냉장실에 보존하면 하얗게 되면서 점점 딱딱하게 굳어집니다.
꿀이 하얗게 굳어지는 것은 포도당이 결정을 만들기 때문이죠. 이렇게 변해도 품질에는 변화가 없지만
물에 타기도, 다루기도 어려워집니다.
꿀을 냉동실에 보관하게되면 걸쭉한 상태를 그대로 유지할 수 있습니다.
[식품 보관 방법]27
기타편
청소 및 손질 방법
냉장고 안과 부속품
▶ 부드러운 천에 깨끗한 물을 묻혀 닦은 후 물기를 제거해 주세요.
▶ 서랍과 선반은 세척 후 물기를 말려서 넣어 주세요.
문의 고무패킹
▶ 부드러운 천에 깨끗한 물을 묻혀 닦고,
홈 사이는 면봉으로 닦아주세요.
냉장고 뒷면
▶ 1년에 한 번 정도 진공청소기로 먼지를 없애면
냉장고 효율이 좋아집니다.
냉장고 안에서 나는 냄새 제거 방법
▶ 오래된 식빵이나 원두커피 찌꺼기 등을 냉장고 안에 넣어두면
나쁜 냄새 제거에 효과적입니다.
냉장고 패킹 부분의 곰팡이 제거 방법
▶ 주방용 세제를 원액 그대로 칫솔 등에 묻혀 닦아주세요.
▶ 냉장고 내부와 외부를 청소할 때는 솔, 수세미, 거친 헝겊 등 표면이 거친 것을
사용하지 마세요.
▶ 청소가 끝난 후에는 전원코드가 손상되지 않았는지, 전원플러그에 발열현상은 없는지,
플러그가 잘 꽂혀 있는지 확인해 주세요.
▶ 제품 아래의 바닥면에 손을 넣지 마세요. 날카로운 부분에 다칠 수 있습니다.
▶ 장기간 사용하지 않거나 청소할 때는 전원플러그를 빼고 문을 열어 물기를 말린 후
마른 헝겊이나 수건 등으로 닦아 주세요.
▶ 물을 직접 뿌리거나 세제나 락스, 아세톤, 신나, 알코올, 염화물, 벤젠 등으로 닦지 마세요.
▶ 물기가 많은 헝겊 등으로 손잡이를 닦지 마세요.28
기타편
청소 및 손질 방법
냉동 / 냉장실 LED 램프
▶ 램프 고장 시 수리는 서비스 센터(전국 어디서나 1588-3366)로
문의하여 주세요.
야채실 / 건조실 덮개
▶ 야채실(냉장)/건조실(냉동) 윗부분의 상자를 먼저 꺼내세요.
▶ 야채실(냉장)/건조실(냉동) 상자 덮개의 양 옆쪽에 있는 걸림부를
누른 후 앞쪽으로 잡아당겨 꺼내세요.
야채실 / 건조실
▶ 야채/건조실을 꺼낼 때에는 냉장실문의 다용도칸을 먼저 꺼내세요.
▶ 한 손으로 잡고 앞으로 당기다가 약간 들어 올리면서 빼세요.
유제품실
▶ 유제품실 덮개는 약간 열어 양 손으로 잡고 왼쪽으로 밀면서
당겨 빼세요.
▶ 유제품실을 양 손으로 잡고 위로 올려 빼세요.
냉동 / 냉장실 다용도칸
▶ 양손으로 잡고 위로 올려 빼내세요.
▶ 야채실/건조실을 다시 넣을 때는 먼저
야채실/건조실 덮개를 완전히 들어올린 후 상자를
넣으세요.
▶ 임의로 분해 및 조립 시 파손될 수 있으므로 주의하세요.29
기타편
▶ 유리용기를 보관할 경우, 강화유리 선반에
마찰로 인한 긁힘(스크래치)이 생길 수 있습니다.
청소를 하기 전에 반드시 전원플러그를 뽑아 주세요. 감전의 위험이 있습니다.
냉장고 내부에 물이 고이기 쉬우므로 부속품은 물기없이 닦은 후 다시 조립해 주세요.
냉동 / 냉장실 다용도칸 세척방법
▶ 미지근한 물에 담그고 흔들거나 부드러운 스펀지 등으로
세척해 주세요.
냉동실 / 냉장실 선반
▶ 앞으로 당긴 후 앞쪽을 밑으로 누르면서 빼세요.
솔라 파워[Solar Power] 탈취기 세척방법
▶ 2년을 주기로, 냄새제거가 잘 안될 때 청소해 주세요.
▶ 햇빛에 24시간 정도 말린 후 분해의 역순으로 조립하여 사용하세요.
탈취기 꺼내는 방법
▶ 선반을 약간 뺀 다음, 탈취기 덮개의 걸림 손잡이를
안쪽으로 누르면서 살짝 위로 당겨 빼면 탈취기가 보입니다.
냉동실 / 냉장실문 손잡이
▶ 손잡이 부위에 얼룩 등이 묻었을 경우 물걸레 또는 마른 헝겊으로
닦아주세요.
냉장실 홈바
▶ 먼저 홈바 위에 있는 다용도칸을 빼세요.
▶ 양손으로 홈바 덮개의 아래부분을 누르며 위로 올려 빼세요.
그림에 표시된 걸림부가 눌리며 홈바가 빠집니다.30
기타편
고장신고 전 확인 사항
증 상 확인 및 처리
물 흐르는 소리가 나요!
(꾸르륵, 지글지글, 벅벅 등)
- 냉장고 내부의 냉매(차갑게 하는 물질)가 액체와 기체로 반복되어
흐를 때 나는 소리입니다.
- 냉각기에 붙어있는 성에가 녹아 물이 되어 흘러내리면서 ‘칙칙’,
‘벅벅’ 등과 같은 소리가 납니다. 이것은 고장이 아니니 안심하고
사용하세요.
냉장고 안에서 ‘뚝’하는
소리가 나요!
(뚝, 딱, 뚜둑, 달그락 등)
- 냉장고 안의 온도가 변할 때 부품이 늘어나거나 줄어들면서 나는 소리입니다.
- 냉각기에 붙어있는 성에가 녹을 때에도 유사한 소리가 발생합니다.
고장이 아니니 안심하고 사용하세요.
‘웅~’, ‘웽~’, ‘드르륵’,
‘덜컥’하는 소리가 나요!
- 냉장고의 운전이 시작되거나 끝날 때 압축기나 팬 등에서 나는
소리입니다. 또는 냉장고 주변온도나 냉장고 안의 상태에 따라
압축기나 팬이 자동으로 빨리 회전했다가 느리게 회전하는 것을
반복하면서 소리가 커졌다 작아졌다할 수 있습니다.
이는 자동차의 시동을 켜거나 끌 때, 또는 가속할 때 발생하는
소리와 유사한 원리이며, 고장이 아니니 안심하고 사용하세요.
방금 설치했는데
소리가 크게 들려요!
- 처음 냉장고를 운전하거나 정전 등으로 냉장고가 재가동될 경우,
냉장고 안의 온도를 빨리 낮추기 위해 압축기나 팬이 빠르게
회전하게 됩니다. 이때 소리가 크게 들릴수 있으며,
길게는 2~3일 이후 일정 온도 이하로 내려가면 압축기나 팬의
회전 속도가 낮아지며 소리가 줄어듭니다.
고장이 아니니 안심하고 사용하세요.
냉장고문을 닫은 직후에
소리가 나요!
(쉬~익, 뚜둑 등)
- 문을 열었다 닫으면 냉장고 안으로 들어온 공기가 빠르게
냉각되면서, 내부 압력이 일시적으로 낮아져 냉장고 뒷면에서
‘쉭~’하는 바람새는 소리가 나거나, 냉장고 내부구조가 일시적으로
변형되면서 ‘뚜둑’과 같은 소리가 날 수 있습니다.
고장이 아니니 안심하고 사용하세요.
소음이 심하고
이상한 소리가 나요.
- 설치 장소의 바닥이 평평하면서 단단한 곳에 설치하세요.
- 냉장고 뒷면과 옆면을 벽면에서 5 cm 이상 띄워주세요.
- 냉장고 뒷면과 옆면에 물건이 있다면 다른 곳으로 치워주세요.
- 냉장고 위에 무거운 물건을 올리지 마세요.31
기타편
증 상 확인 및 처리
냉장고 안에서 냄새가
나요.
얼음에서 냄새가 나요.
- 김치 등의 반찬류는 반드시 뚜껑을 덮거나 랩을 씌워 보관하세요.
특히 육어류, 건어물 등은 꼭 비닐 포장하여 보관하세요.
냉장고 안에 오래 보관된 식품도 냄새의 원인이 될 수 있습니다.
- 식품을 보관하는 통에서 식품이 넘쳐있으면 그 냄새가 얼음에
영향을 미칠 수 있으니 깨끗이 닦아주세요.
- 수돗물로 얼음을 만들 경우 소독약품 냄새가 날 수 있으므로
생수 또는 정수기로 여과된 물을 사용하시면 좋습니다.
- 냉장고 내부를 청소를 할 때 식품을 다른 곳에 보관하시고,
제품의 전원코드를 뺀 다음 2~3시간 후 마른 행주로 닦은 후
냉장고 내부를 환기시켜 보세요.
- 식빵, 원두커피, 참숯, 동판 등을 넣으면 냄새가 제거됩니다.
냉장고문이 잘
안 열려요! - 독립냉각 방식의 냉동실과 냉장실이 각각 틈없이 접착되어
여닫을 때 약간 힘이 들 수 있습니다.
- 냉장고 앞쪽이 뒤쪽보다 높지 않은지 확인하시고, 만약 높다면
냉장고 조절다리로 수평조절을 하세요.
정면에서 보면
냉동실문보다 냉장실문이
약간 내려가 있어요.
- 냉동실에 비해 냉장실은 크기와 무게차가 있고 보이지 않는 하중이
작용하여 이와같은 현상이 나타날 수 있습니다.
문의 높이차 조절은
p17
를 참조하여 주세요.
냉동실에 성에가 생겨요!
(냉장실에 이슬이 맺혀요)
- 주위의 온도나 습도가 높거나, 냉장고문을 장시간 열어 둔 경우,
또는 수분이 많은 식품을 뚜껑없이 보관했을 경우에도 성에나
이슬이 생길 수 있습니다.
냉장고 본체,
냉동실 실내등 덮개에
이슬이 맺혀요!
- 냉동실 실내등은 열이 발생하므로 장시간 열어 놓았을 경우,
바깥과 냉동실의 온도차에 의해 성에가 생길 수 있습니다.
이는 문을 닫으면 사라집니다.
- 냉장고 주위의 습도가 너무 높은 날에는 공기 중의 물기가 냉장고의
차가운 면에 닿아 이슬이 맺힐 수 있습니다.32
기타편
고장신고 전 확인 사항
증 상 확인 및 처리
만지면 뜨거워요!
- 냉장고를 빨리 차갑게 하거나 절전을 위해 앞면 둘레와 옆면에
열이 나는 관이 있기 때문입니다. 특히 처음 설치했거나 여름에는
뜨겁게 느껴질 수 있으나 고장이 아닙니다.
냉동/냉장이 전혀 안돼요.
(냉각이 약해요)
- 전원플러그가 빠져있지 않은지 확인해 주세요.
- 높은 온도로 조절되어 있다면 잠금버튼을 3초간 눌러
잠금 아이콘이 사라진 후 낮은 온도로 조절하세요.
- 냉장고 주위에 햇볕이 내리쬐거나 열기구가 있지 않은지 확인하세요.
- 냉장고 뒷면과 벽은 5 cm 이상 간격을 띄우고 설치하세요.
냉장고 바닥에서
뜨거운 바람이 나와요.
- 냉장고 내부온도를 낮추기 위한 기계(콤프레서)가 동작하면서
발생하는 열이 방출되는 것으로, 냉장고 옆면에서 방출되도록
설계되어 있습니다.
냉장고 옆면이 벽 등으로 막힌 경우는 전면으로도 뜨거운 바람을
느낄 수 있으며, 이 현상은 고장이 아닙니다.
냉장실의 식품이 얼어요.
- 냉장실 온도가 너무 낮은 온도로 설정되어 있다면 적절한 온도로
조절하세요.
- 설치 장소의 주위 온도가 5 ℃ 이하일 경우는 식품이 얼 수 있습니다.
- 수분이 많은 식품은 선반 앞쪽에 보관하세요. 안쪽의 차가운 공기에
직접 닿으면 얼 수 있습니다.
냉장고가 멈추지않고
계속 가동돼요!
- 냉장고 내부온도를 낮추기 위한 기계(콤프레서)의 동작이 멈추어도
차가워진 공기를 일정하게 유지하기 위해 냉장고 내부에 위치한
냉각 팬(FAN)이 동작하기 때문입니다.
이는 정상적인 동작이니 안심하고 사용하세요.(단, 냉장/냉동실 문을
열었을 때 이 동작은 멈춥니다.)
온도 표시부가 켜지지
않아요.
- 에너지 절약을 위해, 아무런 조작이 없으면 10초 후에
온도 표시부가 꺼집니다. 버튼을 누르거나, 냉장고문이나
홈바를 여닫으면 다시 켜집니다.
냉장고 표시부 버튼을
눌러도 작동하지 않아요.
- 잠금 아이콘이 켜져있지 않은지 확인하세요.
- 버튼을 젖은 손으로 만지거나, 물걸레 등으로 청소할 경우
동작하지 않을 수 있습니다. 이는 물기를 제거하면 정상적으로
사용할 수 있습니다.33
기타편
증 상 확인 및 처리
만지면 뜨거워요!
- 냉장고를 빨리 차갑게 하거나 절전을 위해 앞면 둘레와 옆면에
열이 나는 관이 있기 때문입니다. 특히 처음 설치했거나 여름에는
뜨겁게 느껴질 수 있으나 고장이 아닙니다.
냉동/냉장이 전혀 안돼요.
(냉각이 약해요)
- 전원플러그가 빠져있지 않은지 확인해 주세요.
- 높은 온도로 조절되어 있다면 잠금버튼을 3초간 눌러
잠금 아이콘이 사라진 후 낮은 온도로 조절하세요.
- 냉장고 주위에 햇볕이 내리쬐거나 열기구가 있지 않은지 확인하세요.
- 냉장고 뒷면과 벽은 5 cm 이상 간격을 띄우고 설치하세요.
냉장고 바닥에서
뜨거운 바람이 나와요.
- 냉장고 내부온도를 낮추기 위한 기계(콤프레서)가 동작하면서
발생하는 열이 방출되는 것으로, 냉장고 옆면에서 방출되도록
설계되어 있습니다.
냉장고 옆면이 벽 등으로 막힌 경우는 전면으로도 뜨거운 바람을
느낄 수 있으며, 이 현상은 고장이 아닙니다.
냉장실의 식품이 얼어요.
- 냉장실 온도가 너무 낮은 온도로 설정되어 있다면 적절한 온도로
조절하세요.
- 설치 장소의 주위 온도가 5 ℃ 이하일 경우는 식품이 얼 수 있습니다.
- 수분이 많은 식품은 선반 앞쪽에 보관하세요. 안쪽의 차가운 공기에
직접 닿으면 얼 수 있습니다.
냉장고가 멈추지않고
계속 가동돼요!
- 냉장고 내부온도를 낮추기 위한 기계(콤프레서)의 동작이 멈추어도
차가워진 공기를 일정하게 유지하기 위해 냉장고 내부에 위치한
냉각 팬(FAN)이 동작하기 때문입니다.
이는 정상적인 동작이니 안심하고 사용하세요.(단, 냉장/냉동실 문을
열었을 때 이 동작은 멈춥니다.)
온도 표시부가 켜지지
않아요.
- 에너지 절약을 위해, 아무런 조작이 없으면 10초 후에
온도 표시부가 꺼집니다. 버튼을 누르거나, 냉장고문이나
홈바를 여닫으면 다시 켜집니다.
냉장고 표시부 버튼을
눌러도 작동하지 않아요.
- 잠금 아이콘이 켜져있지 않은지 확인하세요.
- 버튼을 젖은 손으로 만지거나, 물걸레 등으로 청소할 경우
동작하지 않을 수 있습니다. 이는 물기를 제거하면 정상적으로
사용할 수 있습니다.
냉장고 사용에 필요한 공간
폭 깊이
높이
1534 mm
1340 mm34
기타편
※ 환경보호 및 자원 재활용을 위해 폐가전은 다음과 같이 처리하셔야 합니다.
유료처리
무료처리
삼성전자 대리점에서 제품을 새로 구입하고 기존 제품을 버리고자하는 경우,
신제품 배달시 무료로 처리해 드립니다.
신규 제품 구입 없이 기존에 사용하던 제품을 버리고자하는 경우,
관할 동 주민센터에 연락하시어 처리하시면 됩니다.
재활용 마크
물품을 사용한 후에 발생되는 폐기물 중에
재활용이 가능한 물품을 사용자가 구별할 수
있도록 표시한 마크입니다.
(종이류, 고철류, 유리병류, 합성수지류 등)
재질표시 마크
합성수지 부품의 재료를 표시하여
재활용이 가능한 폐기물을 재활용업자 등이
쉽게 구분할 수 있도록 표시한 마크입니다.
폐가전 처리안내
모 델 명
구입년월 년 월 일 Serial No.
구 입 처
저희 삼성전자에서는 품목별 소비자 분쟁 해결기준(공정거래위원회 고시)에 따라
아래와 같이 제품에 대한 보증을 실시합니다. 서비스 요청 시, 삼성전자서비스(주) 또는
지정된 협력사에서 서비스합니다. 보상여부 및 내용통보는 요구일로부터 7일 이내에,
피해보상은 통보일로부터 14일 이내에 해결하여 드립니다.
구입 후 1년(제품보증기간) 이내에 제품이 고장난 경우에만 무료서비스를 받을 수 있습니다.
제품보증서에 구입일이 표기되어 있지 않은 경우는 ‘무상 서비스기간 표시모드’로 전환하여
디스플레이 상에 표기된 제품 구입월을 제품보증기간으로 산정합니다.
※ 일반 제품을 영업용으로 전환하여 사용할 경우, 보증기간은 반으로 단축 적용됩니다.
이 보증서는 한국에서만 사용되며, 다시 발행되지 않으므로 사용설명서와 함께 잘 보관해주세요.
고장이 아닌 경우
소비자 과실로 고장난 경우
그밖의 경우
소비자의 고의, 과실로 인한 고장인 경우
소비자 피해유형 품질보증기간 이내 품질보증기간 이후
품질보증기간 이내 품질보증기간 이후
제품기능 사용설명 및 분해하지 않고 처리하는
간단한 조정시
배송된 제품의 초기설치 및 판매점에서
부실하게 설치해주어 재설치시
제품의 이동 및 이상 등으로 인한 설치부실시
구입시 고객이 설치하기로 한 제품을
고객이 재설치 요청시
세척 및 이물제거로 인한 서비스 요청시
천재지변(낙뢰, 화재, 염해, 수해 등)에 의한 고장 발생시
소모성 부품의 수명이 다한 경우(보증기간 이내 포함)
램프류, 필터류, 퓨즈 등
수리가 불가능한 경우
구입 후 10일 이내에 정상적인 사용상태에서 발생한
성능/기능상 하자로 중요한 수리를 요할 때
제품교환 또는 구입가 환급
제품교환 또는 구입가 환급
제품교환 또는 무상수리
제품교환
구입가 환급
해당없음
유상수리
정액 감가상각 금액
10 % 가산하여 환급
정액 감가상각 잔여 금액에
구입가의 5 % 가산하여 환급
정액 감가상각 후 환불
무상수리
유상수리에 해당하는
금액징수 후 제품교환
유상수리
유상수리 금액징수 후
감가상각적용 제품교환
유상수리
구입 후 1개월 이내에 정상적인 사용상태에서 발생한
성능/기능상 하자로 중요한 수리를 요할 때
품질보증기간 이내에 동일 하자로 2회까지 고장 발생 시
품질보증기간 이내에 동일 하자로 3회째 고장 발생 시
품질보증기간 이내에 서로 다른 하자로 5회째 고장 발생 시
수리용 부품은 있으나 수리가 불가한 경우
소비자가 수리의뢰한 제품을 사업자가 분실 시
제품구입시, 운송과정 및 제품설치 중 발생한 피해
교환된 제품이 1개월 이내에 중요한 수리를
요하는 고장 발생시 또는 교환 불가 시
부품 보유기간 이내에 수리용 부품을
보유하고 있지 않아 수리가 불가한 경우
수리가 가능한 경우
소비자의 취급 부주의 또는 함부로 수리 및 개조하여
고장 발생시
삼성전자(주) 서비스 위탁업체인
삼성전자서비스(주) 기사 및 협력사 기사가
아닌 사람이 수리하여 고장 발생시
전기 용량을 다르게 사용하여 고장 발생시
(예: 220 V 제품을 110 V 전원에 사용한 경우 등)
외부 충격이나 떨어뜨림 등에 의한 고장이나
손상 발생시
삼성전자에서 지정하지 않은 소모품이나 옵션품
사용으로 인한 고장 발생시
사용설명서 내의 “주의 사항”을 지키지않아 고장 발생시
※ 냉장고 핵심부품인 압축기의 무상 보증기간은 공정거래위원회 고시기준 3년이나, 인버터 압축기는 10년 무상보증합니다.
제품 보증
기간은 ,
핵심부품(압축기)
보증기간은 ,
부품 보유년한은
8년입니다.
1년
3년
www.samsung.com/sec/모 델 명
구입년월 년 월 일 Serial No.
구 입 처
저희 삼성전자에서는 품목별 소비자 분쟁 해결기준(공정거래위원회 고시)에 따라
아래와 같이 제품에 대한 보증을 실시합니다. 서비스 요청 시, 삼성전자서비스(주) 또는
지정된 협력사에서 서비스합니다. 보상여부 및 내용통보는 요구일로부터 7일 이내에,
피해보상은 통보일로부터 14일 이내에 해결하여 드립니다.
구입 후 1년(제품보증기간) 이내에 제품이 고장난 경우에만 무료서비스를 받을 수 있습니다.
제품보증서에 구입일이 표기되어 있지 않은 경우는 ‘무상 서비스기간 표시모드’로 전환하여
디스플레이 상에 표기된 제품 구입월을 제품보증기간으로 산정합니다.
※ 일반 제품을 영업용으로 전환하여 사용할 경우, 보증기간은 반으로 단축 적용됩니다.
이 보증서는 한국에서만 사용되며, 다시 발행되지 않으므로 사용설명서와 함께 잘 보관해주세요.
고장이 아닌 경우
소비자 과실로 고장난 경우
그밖의 경우
소비자의 고의, 과실로 인한 고장인 경우
소비자 피해유형 품질보증기간 이내 품질보증기간 이후
품질보증기간 이내 품질보증기간 이후
제품기능 사용설명 및 분해하지 않고 처리하는
간단한 조정시
배송된 제품의 초기설치 및 판매점에서
부실하게 설치해주어 재설치시
제품의 이동 및 이상 등으로 인한 설치부실시
구입시 고객이 설치하기로 한 제품을
고객이 재설치 요청시
세척 및 이물제거로 인한 서비스 요청시
천재지변(낙뢰, 화재, 염해, 수해 등)에 의한 고장 발생시
소모성 부품의 수명이 다한 경우(보증기간 이내 포함)
램프류, 필터류, 퓨즈 등
수리가 불가능한 경우
구입 후 10일 이내에 정상적인 사용상태에서 발생한
성능/기능상 하자로 중요한 수리를 요할 때
제품교환 또는 구입가 환급
제품교환 또는 구입가 환급
제품교환 또는 무상수리
제품교환
구입가 환급
해당없음
유상수리
정액 감가상각 금액
10 % 가산하여 환급
정액 감가상각 잔여 금액에
구입가의 5 % 가산하여 환급
정액 감가상각 후 환불
무상수리
유상수리에 해당하는
금액징수 후 제품교환
유상수리
유상수리 금액징수 후
감가상각적용 제품교환
유상수리
구입 후 1개월 이내에 정상적인 사용상태에서 발생한
성능/기능상 하자로 중요한 수리를 요할 때
품질보증기간 이내에 동일 하자로 2회까지 고장 발생 시
품질보증기간 이내에 동일 하자로 3회째 고장 발생 시
품질보증기간 이내에 서로 다른 하자로 5회째 고장 발생 시
수리용 부품은 있으나 수리가 불가한 경우
소비자가 수리의뢰한 제품을 사업자가 분실 시
제품구입시, 운송과정 및 제품설치 중 발생한 피해
교환된 제품이 1개월 이내에 중요한 수리를
요하는 고장 발생시 또는 교환 불가 시
부품 보유기간 이내에 수리용 부품을
보유하고 있지 않아 수리가 불가한 경우
수리가 가능한 경우
소비자의 취급 부주의 또는 함부로 수리 및 개조하여
고장 발생시
삼성전자(주) 서비스 위탁업체인
삼성전자서비스(주) 기사 및 협력사 기사가
아닌 사람이 수리하여 고장 발생시
전기 용량을 다르게 사용하여 고장 발생시
(예: 220 V 제품을 110 V 전원에 사용한 경우 등)
외부 충격이나 떨어뜨림 등에 의한 고장이나
손상 발생시
삼성전자에서 지정하지 않은 소모품이나 옵션품
사용으로 인한 고장 발생시
사용설명서 내의 “주의 사항”을 지키지않아 고장 발생시
※ 냉장고 핵심부품인 압축기의 무상 보증기간은 공정거래위원회 고시기준 3년이나, 인버터 압축기는 10년 무상보증합니다.
제품 보증
기간은 ,
핵심부품(압축기)
보증기간은 ,
부품 보유년한은
8년입니다.
1년
3년
www.samsung.com/sec/사용설명서
삼성 지펠 냉장고
※ 제품 사용에 필요한 내용이 포함되어 있으니 사용 전에 반드시 설명서를 읽어보세요.
사이버 서비스센터 홈페이지
서비스센터 대표번호
삼성전자주식회사 제조자 : 삼성전자(주) / 제조국가 : 대한민국
고객이 직접 원하는 날짜와 시간에 서비스 접수와
실시간 사이버 상담이 가능한 사이버 서비스센터를 운영하고 있습니다.
고장 접수 및 재설치 문의
전국 어디서나
제품 모델명, 고장상태, 연락처를 정확히 알려주시면 고객 여러분의
궁금한 점을 언제나 친절하게 상담, 빠른 서비스를 제공합니다.
1588-3366
www.samsungsvc.co.kr
인터넷 홈페이지
고객상담실
02-541-3000
080-022-3000
· 분실하실 경우 따로 구입해야하므로 보관에 주의하세요.
· 제품의 외관, 사양 등은 제품 개선을 위해 예고없이 변경될 수 있습니다.
· 공용설명서로 설명서의 그림은 구입하신 제품과 일치하지 않을 수도 있습니다.
· 사용설명서 내에 보증서가 있으므로 분실되지 않도록 잘 보관해 주세요.
www.samsung.com/sec/
Mode
d’emploiii
Utilisation
de ce mode
d’emploi
Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu
pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et
les caractéristiques de votre téléphone. Pour une
mise en service rapide, consultez les chapitres
« Découvrez votre téléphone »,
« Installation et mise en service de votre
téléphone »
et « Utilisation des fonctions de base ».
Icones utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi
Avant de mettre votre téléphone en service,
familiarisez-vous avec les icones utilisées dans
ce mode d’emploi :
Avertissement : situations susceptibles
de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres
personnes
Attention : situations susceptibles
d’endommager votre appareil ou
d’autres appareils
Remarque : remarques, conseils
d’utilisation ou informations
complémentaires Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi
iii
Copyright
Les droits sur toutes les technologies et les produits
inclus dans cet appareil sont la propriété de leurs
détenteurs respectifs :
• Bluetooth®
est une marque déposée
de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. dans le monde —
Bluetooth QD ID : B015178.
• Java™ est une marque commerciale
de Sun Microsystems, Inc.
• Windows Media Player®
est une marque
déposée de Microsoft Corporation.
X Renvoi : pages contenant des
informations associées. Exemple :
X p.12 (utilisé en remplacement
de « voir page 12 »)
→ Opération suivante : ordre des options ou
des menus que vous devez sélectionner
pour exécuter une étape. Exemple : en
mode Menu, appuyez sur Messagerie →
Nouveau message signifie que vous
devez d’abord appuyer sur Messagerie,
puis Nouveau message)
[ ] Crochets : touches du téléphone.
Exemple : [ ] (représente la touche
Marche/arrêt/Sortie de menu)iv
Table des
matières
Informations relatives à la sécurité
et à l’utilisation ...........................................1
Mises en garde ..........................................1
Consignes de sécurité ...............................3
Consignes d’utilisation importantes ...........6
Découvrez votre téléphone .....................11
Contenu du coffret ...................................11
Présentation du téléphone .......................12
Touches ...................................................13
Écran .......................................................14
Icones ......................................................14
Installation et mise en service
de votre téléphone .................................. 16
Installer la carte SIM et la batterie ...........16
Mettre la batterie en charge .....................18
Insérer une carte mémoire (facultatif) ......19Table des matières
v
Utilisation des fonctions de base ............ 20
Allumer et éteindre le téléphone ..............20
Utiliser l’écran tactile ................................21
Accéder aux menus .................................22
Utiliser les widgets ...................................22
Accéder aux informations d’aide ..............23
Personnaliser votre téléphone .................23
Utiliser les fonctions d’appel de base ......25
Envoyer et lire des messages ..................26
Ajouter et rechercher des contacts ..........30
Utiliser les fonctions de base
de l’appareil photo ...................................31
Écouter de la musique .............................33
Naviguer sur le Web ................................35
Utilisation des fonctions avancées .......... 36
Utiliser les fonctions d’appel avancées ........36
Utiliser les fonctions avancées
du répertoire ............................................38
Utiliser les fonctions de messagerie
avancées ................................................. 40
Utiliser les fonctions avancées
de l’appareil photo ................................... 41
Fonctions avancées du lecteur MP3 ........ 45
Outils et applications ............................... 49
Utiliser la technologie Bluetooth sans fil ....... 49
Activer et envoyer un message SOS ....... 51
Activer la fonction de traçage du mobile ......52
Simuler des appels ..................................53
Enregistrer et écouter des mémos
vocaux ..................................................... 54
Modifier des images ................................. 55
Imprimer des images ...............................57
Charger des photos et des vidéos
sur le Web ................................................58
Utiliser les jeux et applications Java ........ 59
Synchroniser des données ...................... 60vi
Table des matières
Utiliser un lecteur RSS .............................60
Créer et afficher des horloges
mondiales ................................................61
Paramétrer et utiliser des alarmes ...........62
Utiliser la calculatrice ...............................63
Convertisseur ...........................................63
Régler un compte à rebours ....................64
Utiliser le chronomètre .............................64
Créer une nouvelle tâche .........................65
Créer un mémo texte ...............................65
Gérer le calendrier ...................................65
Dépannage ............................................... a
Index ......................................................... d1
Informations
relatives à la
sécurité et
à l’utilisation
Respectez toujours les précautions suivantes afin
d’éviter les situations dangereuses ou litigieuses
et de permettre un fonctionnement optimal
de votre téléphone portable.
Ne laissez pas le téléphone à la portée
des enfants en bas âge et des animaux
domestiques
Conservez le téléphone et tous ses accessoires hors
de portée des enfants en bas âge et des animaux
de compagnie. Avaler de petites pièces peut provoquer
un étouffement et des blessures graves.
Mises en garde2
Informations relatives à la sécurité et à l’utilisation
Installez le téléphone et ses accessoires
avec précaution
Veillez à ce que votre téléphone et ses accessoires
soient solidement fixés lorsque vous les utilisez à bord
d’un véhicule. Évitez de placer votre téléphone et ses
accessoires à proximité de la zone d’ouverture des
airbags. Les équipements sans fil risquent de provoquer
des blessures graves lors de l’ouverture des airbags
s’ils ne sont pas correctement installés.
Manipulez les batteries et les chargeurs
avec précaution et respectez les consignes
de recyclage
• Utilisez exclusivement les batteries et chargeurs
homologués par Samsung et conçus spécialement
pour votre téléphone. L’utilisation de batteries ou
de chargeurs incompatibles peut provoquer des
blessures graves ou endommager votre téléphone.
• Ne jetez jamais de batteries au feu. Respectez
l’ensemble des réglementations locales relatives
au recyclage des batteries usagées.
• Ne posez jamais les batteries ou le téléphone
à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un appareil chauffant,
tel qu’un four micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un
radiateur. En cas de surchauffe, les batteries sont
susceptibles d’exploser.
• Veillez à ne pas écraser ou perforer la batterie. Évitez
d’exposer la batterie à une pression externe
élevée. Cela risquerait de provoquer un courtcircuit interne et une surchauffe.
Évitez toute interférence avec les
stimulateurs cardiaques
Conformément aux recommandations des fabricants
et du cabinet d’études indépendant Wireless Technology
Research, conservez une distance minimale de 15 cm
entre le téléphone et les stimulateurs cardiaques afin
d’éviter toute interférence. Si vous avez de bonnes
raisons de penser que votre téléphone interfère avec
un stimulateur cardiaque ou tout autre appareil médical,
éteignez immédiatement le téléphone et contactez le
fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de l’appareil
médical pour connaître la marche à suivre.Informations relatives à la sécurité et à l’utilisation
3
Éteignez votre téléphone dans les
environnements potentiellement explosifs
N’utilisez pas votre téléphone dans une station-service
ou à proximité de combustibles ou de produits chimiques.
Chaque fois que des panneaux d’avertissement ou
des consignes de sécurité vous le recommandent,
éteignez votre téléphone. Votre téléphone risque
de déclencher une explosion ou un incendie à proximité
des lieux de stockage de combustibles ou de produits
chimiques, ainsi qu’au sein des zones de transfert ou
de dynamitage. Veillez à ne pas transporter ou stocker
des liquides inflammables, des gaz ou des matières
explosives aux côtés du téléphone, de ses composants
ou de ses accessoires.
Réduisez les risques de lésions
occasionnées par les gestes répétitifs
Lorsque vous utilisez votre téléphone, tenez celui-ci
d’une main détendue, appuyez sur les touches en
douceur, utilisez les fonctions spéciales destinées à
réduire le nombre de touches sur lesquelles vous
devez appuyer (par exemple les modèles et la saisie
intuitive), et pensez à faire des pauses fréquentes.
Soyez prudent lorsque vous conduisez
Évitez d’utiliser votre téléphone lorsque vous conduisez
et respectez les réglementations relatives à l’utilisation
des téléphones portables au volant. Pour plus de
sécurité, utilisez un kit mains libres lorsque cela est
possible.
Respectez toutes les consignes
de sécurité et les réglementations
Respectez toujours les réglementations régissant
l’utilisation des téléphones mobiles dans certaines
zones spécifiques.
Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires
homologués par Samsung
L’utilisation d’accessoires incompatibles peut
endommager votre téléphone ou provoquer des
blessures.
Consignes de sécurité4
Informations relatives à la sécurité et à l’utilisation
Éteignez votre téléphone à proximité
de tout appareil médical
Votre téléphone peut interférer avec les appareils
médicaux utilisés dans les hôpitaux ou les centres
de soin. Respectez toutes les réglementations,
les avertissements et les consignes du personnel
soignant.
Éteignez votre téléphone ou désactivez
les fonctions radio en avion
Votre téléphone peut provoquer des interférences avec
les équipements de l’avion. Respectez les consignes
de la compagnie aérienne et éteignez votre téléphone
ou désactivez les fonctions radio (GSM + Bluetooth)
si le personnel de bord vous y invite.
Évitez d’endommager les batteries
et les chargeurs
• Évitez d’exposer les batteries à des températures
très basses ou très élevées (inférieures à 0 °C/
32 °F ou supérieures à 45 °C/113 °F). Ces
températures extrêmes sont susceptibles de
réduire l’autonomie et la durée de vie des batteries.
• Évitez tout contact des batteries avec des objets
métalliques : cela risquerait de provoquer un courtcircuit entre les bornes + et - de vos batteries et
d’endommager la batterie ou le téléphone
de manière temporaire ou définitive.
• N’utilisez jamais une batterie ou un chargeur
endommagé.Informations relatives à la sécurité et à l’utilisation
5
Manipulez votre téléphone avec
précaution et bon sens
• Veillez à ce que votre téléphone n’entre pas
en contact avec des liquides, car ceux-ci risquent
de l’endommager. Ne manipulez pas le téléphone
si vos mains sont mouillées. Si de l’eau pénètre
dans votre téléphone, la garantie du fabricant est
annulée.
• Évitez d’utiliser ou de stocker votre téléphone dans
des environnements poussiéreux ou sales, car
cela risque d’endommager les pièces mobiles
du téléphone.
• Votre téléphone est un appareil électronique
complexe. Protégez-le des impacts et des chocs
pour éviter de l’endommager.
• Ne peignez pas votre téléphone : la peinture risque
de bloquer les pièces mobiles et d’empêcher le
bon fonctionnement de l’appareil.
• Si votre téléphone est équipé d’un flash ou de tout
autre dispositif d’éclairage, évitez de l’utiliser trop
près des yeux des enfants ou des animaux.
• Les appareils générant un champ magnétique
peuvent perturber le fonctionnement du téléphone et
des cartes mémoire. N’utilisez pas de housses ou
d’accessoires équipés de fermeture magnétiques
et ne laissez pas le téléphone en contact prolongé
avec des champs magnétiques.
Évitez les interférences avec d’autres
appareils électroniques
Votre téléphone émet des signaux de radiofréquence
(RF) susceptibles d’interférer avec les équipements
électroniques insuffisamment ou mal protégés :
stimulateurs cardiaques, appareils auditifs,
équipements médicaux, systèmes électroniques
installés dans les logements ou embarqués dans
les véhicules, etc.
Si vous rencontrez des problèmes d’interférences,
contactez le fabricant de votre appareil électronique.6
Informations relatives à la sécurité et à l’utilisation
Utilisez votre téléphone en position normale
Évitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne de votre
téléphone.
Toute réparation de votre téléphone doit
être réalisée par un technicien agréé
Si vous autorisez des personnes non habilitées
à réparer votre téléphone, celui-ci risque d’être
endommagé et votre garantie sera annulée.
Veillez à préserver la durée de vie de la
batterie et du chargeur
• Évitez de laisser la batterie se charger pendant
plus d’une semaine, car ce type de surcharge peut
réduire sa durée de vie.
• Au fil du temps, les batteries inutilisées se déchargent
progressivement et doivent être rechargées pour
pouvoir être à nouveau utilisées.
• Lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas, débranchez
le chargeur de la source d’alimentation.
• Utilisez la batterie uniquement avec votre
téléphone et ne la destinez pas à d’autres usages.
Manipulez les cartes SIM et les cartes
mémoire avec précaution
• Ne retirez pas une carte pendant que le téléphone y
transfère des informations ou accède à des données,
car cela risquerait de provoquer une perte de données
et d’endommager la carte ou le téléphone.
• Protégez la carte des chocs, de l’électricité statique
et des bruits parasites émis par d’autres appareils.
• Des opérations d’écriture et d’effacement trop
fréquentes réduisent la durée de vie de la carte
mémoire.
• Ne touchez pas la puce ou les bornes avec vos
doigts ou des objets métalliques. Essuyez la carte
à l’aide d’un chiffon doux si elle semble sale.
Consignes d’utilisation importantesInformations relatives à la sécurité et à l’utilisation
7
Vérifiez que vous pouvez contacter
les services d’urgence
Dans certaines zones ou dans certaines circonstances,
il peut être impossible de passer des appels d’urgence.
Avant de vous rendre dans des zones isolées ou non
couvertes, prévoyez d’autres moyens permettant de
contacter les services d’urgence.
Informations relatives au débit
d’absorption spécifique (DAS)
Votre téléphone est conforme aux normes de
l’Union européenne limitant l’exposition humaine
aux radiofréquences émises par les équipements de
radiocommunications et terminaux de télécommunications.
Ces normes interdisent la vente de téléphones
portables dont le niveau d’exposition maximal
(appelé débit d’absorption spécifique ou DAS)
dépasse 2,0 watts par kilogramme de tissu humain.
Lors des tests réalisés, la valeur DAS maximale
enregistrée pour ce modèle s’élevait à 0,531 watts
par kilogramme. En conditions normales d’utilisation,
la valeur effective du DAS sera probablement inférieure,
car ce téléphone a été conçu pour émettre uniquement
l’énergie radiofréquence minimale nécessaire pour
transmettre un signal au relais le plus proche. Chaque
fois que cela est possible, le téléphone réduit
automatiquement son niveau d’émission et par
conséquent votre niveau d’exposition à l’énergie
radiofréquence.
Cependant, par mesure de précaution, quelques
dispositions simples peuvent contribuer à diminuer
le niveau d’exposition aux radiofréquences. Ainsi,
afin de réduire au maximum la puissance d’émission
de votre téléphone, veillez à l’utiliser dans des
conditions de réception optimales, l’indicateur de
puissance du signal affiché à l’écran comportant
alors un nombre suffisant de barres. En général,
plus vous êtes proche d’un relais, moins la
puissance utilisée par le téléphone est élevée.
Par ailleurs, il est également recommandé d’utiliser
autant que possible le kit piéton. Cependant, on
veillera dans ce cas à éloigner le téléphone du
ventre des femmes enceintes et du bas ventre
des enfants et des adolescents.8
Informations relatives à la sécurité et à l’utilisation
La déclaration de conformité qui se trouve à la fin
de ce mode d’emploi prouve que votre téléphone
est conforme à la directive européenne relative
aux équipements hertziens et aux équipements
terminaux de télécommunications (directive R&TTE).
Pour plus d’informations sur le DAS et les normes
de l’Union européenne associées, visitez le site Web
des téléphones Samsung.
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut
de ce produit
(Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable dans les pays de l’Union
Européenne et dans d’autres pays
européens pratiquant le tri sélectif)
Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires
ou sa documentation indique que ni le
produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques
usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.)
ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets
ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets
présentant des risques environnementaux et de
santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et
accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous
favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les
compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable.
Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin
leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner
auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les
procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits
en vue de leur recyclage.
Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités
à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter
les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit
et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec
les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux.Informations relatives à la sécurité et à l’utilisation
9
Elimination des batteries
(Applicable aux pays de l’Union
européenne et aux autres pays européens
dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte
sélective sont mis en place)
Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou
l’emballage indique que les batteries de ce
produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie
avec les autres déchets ménagers. L’indication
éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb
signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de
mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux
niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE
2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas correctement
éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice
à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement.
Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et
d’encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à
séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et
à les recycler via votre système local de collecte
gratuite des batteries.
Avis
Certains contenus et services accessibles grâce à cet
équipement sont la propriété de tiers et sont protégés
par des droits d’auteur, brevets, marques et/ou autres
législations applicables en matière de propriété
intellectuelle. Ces contenus et services vous sont
fournis uniquement pour un usage privé et noncommercial. Vous n’êtes pas autorisé à utiliser le
contenu ou les services dans des conditions qui n’ont
pas été autorisées par le propriétaire du contenu ou
le fournisseur du service. Sans limiter ce qui précède,
sauf autorisation expresse du propriétaire du contenu
ou du fournisseur du service concerné, vous vous
interdisez, notamment, de modifier, reproduire, republier, charger, afficher, transmettre, traduire, vendre,
exploiter, distribuer ou créer des œuvres dérivées
à partir des contenus ou services fournis grâce
à cet équipement, de quelque manière que ce soit.10
Informations relatives à la sécurité et à l’utilisation
« LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES TIERS SONT
FOURNIS "EN L’ETAT". SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT
NI LES CONTENUS NI LES SERVICES AINSI
FOURNIS, NI EXPRESSEMENT NI IMPLICITEMENT,
POUR QUELQUE USAGE QUE CE SOIT. SAMSUNG
EXCLUT EXPRESSEMENT TOUTES GARANTIES
TACITES, Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS LIMITATION,
TOUTES GARANTIES DE COMMERCIALISATION
ET D’ADEQUATION A UN USAGE PARTICULIER.
SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS L’EXACTITUDE,
LA VALIDITE, L’OPPORTUNITE, LA LEGALITE OU
L’EXHAUSTIVITE DU CONTENU OU DES SERVICES
MIS A DISPOSITION PAR LE BIAIS DE CET
EQUIPEMENT, ET EN AUCUN CAS, Y COMPRIS LA
NEGLIGENCE, SAMSUNG NE SERA TENU POUR
RESPONSABLE, EN MATIERE CONTRACTUELLE
COMME DELICTUELLE, DE QUELQUE DOMMAGE
DIRECT, INDIRECT, ACCESSOIRE, SPECIAL OU
PRINCIPAL, DE FRAIS D’AVOCATS, DE DEPENSES,
OU DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE RESULTANT DE,
OU EN RELATION AVEC, TOUTE INFORMATION
CONTENUE DANS, OU RESULTANT DE
L’UTILISATION DE TOUT CONTENU OU SERVICE
PAR VOUS OU TOUT TIERS, MÊME SI AVISÉ DE
LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. »
Les services tiers peuvent être résiliés ou interrompus
à tout moment par les prestataires tiers. Samsung ne
garantit pas que le contenu ou le service soit disponible
sur la durée. Le contenu et les services sont transmis
par des tiers par le biais de réseaux et d’équipements
de transmission sur lesquels Samsung n’exerce aucun
contrôle. Samsung exclut de manière expresse toute
responsabilité en cas d’interruption ou de suspension
de tout contenu ou service mis à disposition grâce
à cet équipement, sous réserve qu’une telle interruption
ou suspension ne soit pas directement imputable
à Samsung.
Samsung n’est pas davantage responsable du service
clientèle associé aux contenu et services. Toute
question ou réclamation concernant le contenu ou
les services fournis doit être adressée directement
ou fournisseurs de contenus et de services concernés.11
Découvrez
votre
téléphone
Cette section vous présente votre téléphone, ses
touches, son écran et ses icones.
Contenu du coffret
Vérifiez que le coffret contient les éléments
suivants :
• Téléphone
• Batterie
• Chargeur
• Mode d’emploi
Les éléments fournis avec votre téléphone
peuvent varier selon le logiciel et les
accessoires proposés dans votre région
ou par votre opérateur téléphonique.
Vous pouvez acquérir des accessoires
supplémentaires auprès de votre revendeur
Samsung. 12
Découvrez votre téléphone
Présentation du téléphone
Touches et fonctions situées sur la face avant
de votre téléphone :
Touches et fonctions situées sur la face arrière
de votre téléphone :
Marche/arrêt/
Sortie de menu
Touche d’appel
Écran tactile
Ecouteur
Touche Retour
Microphone
Connecteur
à fonctions
multiples
Touche volume
Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile et les
touches pour empêcher toute utilisation
malencontreuse du téléphone. Pour verrouiller,
appuyez sur la touche Verrouillage.
Cache de la
batterie
Objectif de
l’appareil
Touche Appareil
photo
Antenne
interne
Touche
Verrouillage
MiroirDécouvrez votre téléphone
13
Touches
Touche Fonction
Appel
Permet d’émettre ou de recevoir
un appel. En mode veille, permet
de récupérer le numéro des derniers
appels émis, manqués ou reçus
Retour
En mode menu, permet de revenir
au niveau précédent
Marche/
arrêt/
Sortie
de menu
Permet d’allumer et d’éteindre le
téléphone (maintenir cette touche
enfoncée) ou de mettre fin à un
appel. En mode menu, permet de
revenir à l’écran du menu principal
ou en mode veille
Volume
Permet de régler le volume
du téléphone
Verrouillage
Permet de verrouiller
ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile
et les touches
Appareil
photo
En mode veille, permet d’activer
l’appareil photo (maintenir cette
touche enfoncée). En mode Appareil
photo, permet de prendre une
photo ou d’enregistrer une vidéo
Touche Fonction14
Découvrez votre téléphone
Écran
L’écran de votre téléphone comporte les zones
suivantes :
Icones
Apprenez à différencier les icones qui s’affichent
sur votre écran.
Zone d’icones
Affiche les différentes icones
Zone de textes et de graphismes
Affiche les messages, les
instructions et les informations
que vous entrez
Icone Définition
Puissance du signal
Réseau GPRS connecté
Transfert de données en cours
via un réseau GPRS
Réseau EDGE connecté
Transfert de données en cours
via un réseau EDGE
Appel vocal en cours
Carte mémoire insérée
Alarme activéeDécouvrez votre téléphone
15
Navigation sur le web
Connecté à une page WAP sécurisée
Itinérance (en dehors de la zone
normalement couverte)
Renvoi d’appel activé
Bluetooth activé
Kit mains libres pour voiture connecté
ou oreillette Bluetooth connectée
Synchronisation avec un ordinateur
Nouveau SMS
Nouveau MMS
Nouvel e-mail
Icone Définition
Nouveau message vocal
Profil Normal activé
Profil Discret activé
Niveau de charge de la batterie
Heure
Icone Définition16
Installation et
mise en service
de votre
téléphone
Commencez par installer et configurer
votre téléphone en vue de sa première utilisation.
Installer la carte SIM et la batterie
Lorsque vous vous abonnez à un réseau de
téléphonie mobile, une carte SIM (Subscriber
Identity Module) vous est remise. Elle vous
permet de vous identifier et contient tous les
détails de votre abonnement (code PIN, services
disponibles en option, etc.).
Pour installer la carte SIM et la batterie :
1. Retirez le cache de la batterie.
Si le téléphone est allumé, maintenez
la touche [ ] enfoncée pour l’éteindre.Installation et mise en service de votre téléphone
17
2. Insérez la carte SIM. 3. Installez la batterie.
• Placez la carte SIM dans le téléphone, 4. Remettez le cache de la batterie en place.
puce orientée vers le bas.
• Sans carte SIM, vous pouvez utiliser
les services qui ne nécessitent pas
de connexion radio (GSM + Bluetooth)
ainsi que certains menus.18
Installation et mise en service de votre téléphone
Mettre la batterie en charge
Avant d’utiliser votre téléphone pour la première
fois, vous devez charger la batterie.
1. Ouvrez le cache du connecteur à fonctions
multiples.
2. Branchez le chargeur sur le connecteur
à fonctions multiples.
3. Branchez le chargeur sur une prise de courant.
4. Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée
(l’icone ne clignote plus), débranchez
le chargeur de la prise de courant.
5. Débranchez le chargeur du téléphone.
6. Refermez le cache du connecteur à fonctions
multiples.
Un raccordement incorrect du chargeur peut
sérieusement endommager votre téléphone.
Tous les dommages résultant d’une
mauvaise utilisation annulent la garantie.
Triangle orienté vers le haut
À propos du témoin de faible charge
Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie
est faible, le téléphone émet un signal
d’avertissement et affiche un message
de batterie faible. L’icone de la batterie
est également vide et clignote. Lorsque le
niveau de charge de la batterie devient trop
faible, le téléphone s’éteint automatiquement.
Rechargez la batterie pour pouvoir continuer
à utiliser votre téléphone.Installation et mise en service de votre téléphone
19
Insérer une carte mémoire (facultatif)
Pour stocker des fichiers multimédia supplémentaires,
vous pouvez insérer une carte mémoire dans votre
téléphone. Votre téléphone accepte les cartes
mémoire microSD™ jusqu’à 8 Go (en fonction
du fabricant et du type de carte mémoire).
1. Retirez le couvercle de la batterie ainsi que
la batterie.
2. Insérez une carte mémoire, étiquette orientée
vers le bas.
3. Poussez la carte mémoire dans son
emplacement pour la mettre en place.
4. Insérez la batterie et remettez le cache
en place.
Pour retirer la carte mémoire, retirez le cache
de la batterie et la batterie, puis retirez la carte
mémoire de son emplacement.20
Utilisation
des fonctions
de base
Apprenez à effectuer les opérations de base et à
utiliser les fonctions principales de votre téléphone
portable.
Allumer et éteindre le téléphone
Pour allumer le téléphone :
1. Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée.
2. Saisissez votre code PIN et appuyez sur
Confirmer (si nécessaire).
Pour éteindre votre téléphone, répétez
l’étape 1 ci-dessus.
Activer le profil Hors-ligne
En activant le profil Hors-ligne, vous pouvez
utiliser les services qui ne nécessitent pas
de connexion radio (GSM + Bluetooth) dans
les zones où l’utilisation d’appareils sans fil est
interdite (avions, hôpitaux, etc.).21
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Pour passer en mode Hors-ligne, en mode Menu,
appuyez sur Paramètres → Profils → Hors-ligne.
Utiliser l’écran tactile
Apprenez les actions de base pour utiliser l’écran
tactile.
Vous pouvez effectuer les actions suivantes sur
l’écran tactile de votre téléphone :
• Appuyez sur une icone pour ouvrir un menu
ou lancer une application.
Nous vous invitons à tenir compte des
panneaux d’avertissement et à suivre les
instructions des professionnels travaillant
dans les zones dans lesquelles les
périphériques sans fil sont interdits.
Pour une utilisation optimale de l’écran
tactile, ôtez le film de protection de l’écran
avant d’utiliser votre téléphone.22
Utilisation des fonctions de base
• Faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou vers
le bas pour faire défiler les listes verticales.
• Faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou vers la
droite pour faire défiler les listes horizontales.
Accéder aux menus
Pour accéder aux menus de votre téléphone :
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur Menu pour
accéder au mode Menu.
2. Sélectionnez un menu ou une option.
3. Appuyez sur la touche Retour pour revenir au
niveau supérieur. Appuyez deux fois sur [ ]
pour revenir en mode veille.
Utiliser les widgets
Découvrez comment utiliser les widgets
de la barre d’outils des widgets.
• Certains de vos widgets se connectent à
des services web. Sélectionner un widget
en ligne peut entraîner des frais
supplémentaires.
• Les widgets disponibles peuvent varier
en fonction de votre région ou de votre
opérateur téléphonique.23
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Ouvrir la barre d’outils des widgets
En mode veille, appuyez sur la flèche bas à gauche
de l’écran pour ouvrir la barre d’outils des widgets.
Il est possible de réorganiser les widgets dans
la barre d’outils des widgets, ou de les déplacer
dans l’écran de veille.
Ajouter les widgets à l’écran de veille
1. Ouvrez la barre d’outils des widgets.
2. Faites glisser un widget de la barre d’outils
des widgets vers l’écran de veille. Vous pouvez
positionner le widget n’importe où sur l’écran.
Changer les widgets
1. En mode Menu, appuyez sur Paramètres →
Affichage et luminosité → Widgets.
2. Sélectionnez les widgets à inclure à la barre
d’outils des widgets et choisissez Enregistrer.
Accéder aux informations d’aide
Apprenez à accéder à des informations utiles
concernant votre téléphone.
1. Ouvrez la barre d’outils des widgets.
2. Appuyez sur dans la barre d’outils
des widgets.
3. Basculez votre téléphone vers la gauche pour
un affichage en mode paysage.
4. Sélectionnez une rubrique d’aide pour en
savoir plus sur une application ou une fonction.
5. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou vers
la droite pour obtenir des informations
complémentaires. Pour revenir au niveau
précédent, appuyez sur .
Personnaliser votre téléphone
Optimisez les fonctions de votre téléphone
en le personnalisant selon vos préférences.24
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Régler le volume des touches
En mode veille, appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler
le volume des touches.
Régler l’intensité des vibrations sur
l’écran tactile
Vous pouvez régler l’intensité des vibrations émises
quand vous appuyez sur l’écran du téléphone.
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur [ / ].
2. Appuyez sur Vibreur et réglez l’intensité
des vibrations.
Activer ou désactiver le profil discret
En mode veille, appuyez sur Clavier et maintenez
la touche enfoncée pour activer ou désactiver
le mode silencieux de votre téléphone.
Modifier la sonnerie
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Paramètres →
Profils.
2. Appuyez sur à côté du profil désiré.
3. Appuyez sur Sonnerie appel vocal.
4. Sélectionnez une sonnerie dans la liste
et appuyez sur Enregistrer.
5. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
Sélectionner un fond d’écran (mode veille)
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Paramètres →
Affichage et luminosité → Fond d’écran.
2. Faites défiler vers la gauche ou vers la droite
et sélectionnez l’image désirée.
3. Appuyez sur Appliquer.25
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Verrouiller le téléphone
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Paramètres →
Sécurité.
2. Appuyez sur ON sous Verrouillage
téléphone.
3. Entrez un nouveau mot de passe de 4 à
8 chiffres, puis appuyez sur Confirmer.
4. Confirmez le nouveau mot de passe, puis
appuyez sur Confirmer.
Utiliser les fonctions d’appel de base
Découvrez comment passer et recevoir des
appels et utiliser les fonctions d’appel de base.
Émettre un appel
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur Clavier,
saisissez l’indicatif régional, si nécessaire,
et le numéro de téléphone à composer.
2. Appuyez sur → Appel vocal ou sur [ ]
pour composer le numéro.
3. Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur [ ].
Répondre à un appel
1. À l’arrivée d’un appel, appuyez sur [ ].
2. Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur [ ].
Lorsque vous accédez pour la première fois
à un menu protégé par mot de passe, vous
devez créer puis confirmer votre mot de passe.
Lorsque vous êtes en communication,
l’appareil verrouille automatiquement l’écran
tactile et les touches pour éviter toute saisie
accidentelle. Pour déverrouiller l’appareil,
appuyez sur la touche Verrouillage.26
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Régler le volume d’écoute
Pour régler le volume en cours d’appel, appuyez
sur [ / ].
Fonction haut-parleur
1. Lorsque vous êtes en communication, appuyez
sur HP → Oui pour activer le haut-parleur.
2. Pour revenir à l’écouteur, appuyez sur HP.
Utiliser un kit piéton
En branchant un kit piéton sur le téléphone, vous
pouvez passer et recevoir des appels :
• Pour rappeler le dernier numéro, appuyez sur la
touche du kit piéton, puis appuyez sur cette touche
une nouvelle fois tout en la maintenant enfoncée.
• Pour répondre à un appel, appuyez sur
la touche du kit piéton.
• Pour mettre fin à un appel, appuyez sur
la touche du kit piéton.
Envoyer et lire des messages
Découvrez comment envoyer et lire des SMS,
des MMS et des e-mails.
Envoyer un SMS ou MMS
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Messagerie →
Nouveau message → Message.
Vous pouvez rejeter des appels entrants à
l’aide du rejet automatique. En mode Menu,
sélectionnez Paramètres → Applications →
Appel → Tous les appels → Rejet
automatique → ON.
Avec la fonction haut-parleur, il vous sera
difficile d’entendre clairement les appels
dans un environnement bruyant. Utilisez
le mode de combiné classique pour une
meilleure qualité sonore.27
Utilisation des fonctions de base
2. Appuyez sur Ajouter destinataire(s) →
Saisie manuelle.
3. Entrez le numéro du destinataire, puis
appuyez sur OK.
4. Appuyez sur Appuyez pour ajouter le texte.
5. Saisissez le texte de votre message, puis
appuyez sur OK. X Saisir du texte
Pour l’envoyer sous forme de SMS, passez
à l’étape 7. Pour joindre un fichier multimédia,
passez à l’étape 6.
6. Appuyez sur Ajouter des fichiers et ajoutez
un élément.
7. Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message.
Envoyer un e-mail
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Messagerie →
Nouveau message → E-mail.
2. Appuyez sur Ajouter destinataire(s) →
Saisie manuelle.
3. Entrez l’adresse e-mail du destinataire, puis
appuyez sur OK.
4. Appuyez sur Ajouter objet.
5. Saisissez l’objet du message, puis
appuyez sur OK.
6. Appuyez sur Appuyez pour ajouter le texte.
7. Saisissez le texte de votre e-mail, puis
appuyez sur OK.
8. Appuyez sur Ajouter des fichiers → un type
d’élément et joignez un fichier (si nécessaire).
9. Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message.
Saisir du texte
Avec l’écran tactile du téléphone, vous pouvez
saisir du texte et créer des messages ou des notes.28
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Changer de mode de saisie
Lorsque vous ouvrez le mode de saisie de texte,
le clavier virtuel apparaît. Sélectionnez le menu
déroulant Clavier et choisissez l’une des
méthodes de saisie de texte suivantes :
• Clavier
• Saisie plein écr.
• Zone de saisie 1
• Zone de saisie 2
Saisie de texte avec le clavier virtuel
1. Sélectionnez la méthode de saisie
de texte Clavier.
2. Appuyez sur la touche virtuelle appropriée
pour saisir le texte.
• Pour changer la casse, utiliser des chiffres
ou des symboles, appuyez sur Abc.
• Pour saisir du texte en mode T9,
appuyez sur T9.
Les modes de saisie de texte suivants sont
disponibles :
Mode Fonction
ABC
Appuyez autant de fois que nécessaire sur la
touche virtuelle correspondant au caractére à
saisir jusqu’à ce qu'il s’affiche.
T9
1. Appuyez une seule fois sur les touches
virtuelles correspondant aux caractères
pour saisir un mot dans son intégralité.
2. Lorsque le mot correct apparaît,
appuyez sur pour insérer un
espace. Si le mot correct ne s’affiche
pas, sélectionnez un autre mot dans
la liste qui apparaît.
123
Appuyez sur la touche virtuelle
correspondant au chiffre à saisir.
Symbole
Appuyez sur la touche virtuelle
correspondant au symbole à saisir.29
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Saisie de texte avec la saisie manuscrite
plein écran
1. Sélectionnez la méthode de saisie de texte
Saisie plein écr.
2. Écrivez les caractères un à un n’importe où sur
l’écran.
Pour changer la casse, utiliser des chiffres
ou des symboles, appuyez sur Abc.
Saisie de texte avec la zone de saisie 1
1. Sélectionnez la méthode de saisie de texte
Zone de saisie 1.
2. Écrivez les caractères un à un dans la zone
d’écriture en bas de l’écran.
Écrivez les chiffres et les symboles dans la
colonne ?1 en bas à droite de la zone d’écriture.
Saisie de texte avec la zone de saisie 2
1. Sélectionnez la méthode de saisie de texte
Zone de saisie 2.
2. Écrivez chaque caractère dans la zone
d’écriture en bas de l’écran.
Pour changer la casse, utiliser des chiffres ou
des symboles, appuyez sur Abc.
Lire un SMS ou un MMS
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Messagerie →
Boîte de réception.
2. Sélectionnez un SMS ou un MMS.
Lire un e-mail
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Messagerie →
E-mails reçus.
2. Sélectionnez un compte.
3. Appuyez sur Téléch.
4. Sélectionnez un e-mail ou un en-tête.
5. Si vous avez choisi un en-tête, choisissez
Récupérer pour afficher le contenu de
l’e-mail.30
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Ajouter et rechercher des contacts
Apprenez les notions de base vous permettant
d’utiliser le répertoire.
Ajouter un nouveau contact
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur Clavier et entrez
un numéro de téléphone.
2. Appuyez sur → Enregistrer n° →
Nouveau.
3. Appuyez sur Télépho... ou SIM.
4. Complétez les coordonnées du contact.
5. Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour ajouter
le contact à la mémoire.
Rechercher un contact
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur Répertoire.
2. Appuyez sur le champ de recherche,
saisissez la lettre du nom recherché
et appuyez sur OK.
Vous pouvez également faire glisser pour
sélectionner la première lettre du nom.
3. Appuyez sur le nom du contact dans la liste
des résultats.
Une fois le contact trouvé, vous pouvez :
• appeler le contact en appuyant sur
• modifier les coordonnées du contact
en sélectionnant Modifier31
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Utiliser les fonctions de base
de l’appareil photo
Découvrez comment prendre et visualiser des
photos et enregistrer et visionner des vidéos.
Prendre des photos
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur la touche
Appareil Photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2. Basculez le téléphone vers la gauche pour
un affichage en mode paysage.
3. Orientez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez
à la mise au point.
• Pour régler la balance des blancs de l’image,
appuyez sur .
• Pour sélectionner le délai du retardateur,
appuyez sur .
• Pour définir la luminosité, appuyez sur .
4. Pour prendre un cliché, appuyez sur la touche
Appareil photo.
La photo est enregistrée automatiquement.
Après avoir pris les photos, appuyez sur pour
afficher les photos rapidement.
Lorsque vous activez l’appareil photo, le
téléphone peut afficher un écran vide en
raison d’une décharge électrostatique
temporaire. Redémarrez le téléphone pour
résoudre ce problème.32
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Visualiser des photos
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Mes fichiers →
Images → Mes photos → un fichier photo.
2. Basculez le téléphone vers la gauche pour
un affichage en mode paysage.
• Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche
ou la droite pour afficher les photos.
• Appuyez sur → ou sur pour effectuer
un zoom avant ou arrière. Pour mettre fin au
zoom, appuyez sur la touche Retour.
Enregistrer des vidéos
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur la touche
Appareil Photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2. Basculez le téléphone vers la gauche pour
un affichage en mode paysage.
3. Appuyez sur pour passer en mode
Caméscope.
4. Orientez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez
à la mise au point.
• Pour régler la balance des blancs de la vidéo,
appuyez sur .
• Pour sélectionner le délai du retardateur,
appuyez sur .
• Pour définir la luminosité, appuyez sur .
5. Appuyez sur la touche Appareil photo pour
lancer l’enregistrement.
6. Appuyez sur ou sur la touche Appareil
photo pour arrêter l’enregistrement.
La vidéo est enregistrée automatiquement.
Après avoir enregistré des vidéos, appuyez
sur pour visualiser rapidement les vidéos.33
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Visionner des vidéos
En mode Menu, sélectionnez Mes fichiers →
Vidéos → Mes vidéos → un fichier vidéo.
Écouter de la musique
Découvrez comment écouter de la musique
via le lecteur MP3 ou la radio FM.
Écouter la radio FM
1. Branchez un kit piéton sur le connecteur
à fonctions multiples du téléphone.
2. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Radio FM.
3. Appuyez sur Oui pour effectuer une
recherche automatique des stations.
La radio effectue un balayage et mémorise
automatiquement les stations disponibles.
4. Commandez la radio FM à l’aide des icones
suivantes :
Lorsque vous utilisez la radio FM pour
la première fois, vous devez effectuer
une recherche automatique des stations.
Icone Fonction
Paramétrer les fréquences des stations
sur votre téléphone
Modifier la sortie audio
Régler une station de radio,
sélectionner une station de radio
enregistrée (maintenir appuyée)
Allumer la radio FM
Éteindre la radio FM34
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Écouter des fichiers musicaux
Pour transférer des fichiers sur votre téléphone
ou votre carte mémoire, vous pouvez :
• Télécharger sur le web. X p. 35
• Télécharger depuis un ordinateur à l’aide du
logiciel Samsung PC Studio (en option). X p. 45
• Recevoir des fichiers via Bluetooth. X p. 50
• Copier des fichiers sur votre carte mémoire.
X p. 45
• Synchroniser avec le Lecteur Windows Media 11.
X p. 46
Après avoir transféré les fichiers sur votre
téléphone ou votre carte mémoire :
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Musique →
Lecteur MP3.
2. Sélectionnez une catégorie → un fichier
audio.
3. Intervenez sur la lecture des fichiers à l’aide
des icones suivantes :
Icone Fonction
Mettre la lecture en pause
Lancer la lecture
Revenir au fichier précédent ou revenir
en arrière dans un fichier (maintenir
appuyée)
Passer au fichier suivant ou avancer
dans un fichier (maintenir appuyée)
Sélectionner un type d’égaliseur
Modifier le mode répétition
Activer le mode de lecture aléatoire35
Utilisation des fonctions de base
Naviguer sur le Web
Découvrez comment accéder à vos pages Web
préférées et les enregistrer comme favoris.
Naviguer sur le Web
1. En mode Menu, appuyez sur Navigateur →
Accueil pour lancer la page d’accueil
de votre opérateur téléphonique.
2. Parcourez les pages Web à l’aide des icones
suivantes :
Enregistrer des pages Web dans les favoris
1. En mode Menu, appuyez sur Navigateur →
Favoris.
2. Appuyez sur Ajouter.
3. Saisissez un titre ou une adresse Web (URL)
de page.
4. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
• L’accès au Web et le téléchargement
de fichiers peuvent entraîner des frais
supplémentaires.
• Le menu du navigateur peut avoir différentes
appellations en fonction de votre opérateur.
• Les icones disponibles peuvent varier
en fonction de votre région ou de votre
opérateur téléphonique.
Icone Fonction
Revenir à la page précédente ou passer
à la page suivante
Actualiser la page Web affichée
Revenir à la page d’accueil
Ouvrir la liste des favoris enregistrés
Changer le mode d’affichage
Accéder à une liste d’options du navigateur36
Utilisation des
fonctions
avancées
Apprenez à maîtriser des notions plus avancées
et à utiliser les fonctions supplémentaires de votre
téléphone portable.
Utiliser les fonctions d’appel avancées
Apprenez à utiliser les fonctions d’appel
avancées de votre téléphone.
Afficher les appels manqués et rappeler
les numéros correspondants
Votre téléphone affiche à l’écran les appels
auxquels vous n’avez pas répondu. Pour
composer le numéro d’un appel manqué :
1. Dans le widget d’alerte d’événement, appuyez
sur l’appel manqué dont vous souhaitez rappeler
le numéro ou appuyez sur Journal lorsque vous
avez manqué plus d'un appel.
2. Appuyez sur [ ] pour composer le numéro.
Rappeler un numéro récemment composé
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur [ ] pour afficher
la liste des derniers numéros composés.
2. Sélectionner le numéro souhaité, puis appuyez sur
ou appuyez sur [ ] appeler le numéro.37
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
Mettre un appel en attente et reprendre
un appel mis en attente
Appuyez sur Attente pour mettre un appel
en attente ou sur Récup. pour reprendre
un appel en attente.
Passer un deuxième appel
Si votre réseau prend cette fonction en charge,
vous pouvez composer un autre numéro tout en
étant en ligne :
1. Pour mettre le premier appel en attente,
appuyez sur Attente.
2. Appuyez sur Clavier, saisissez le deuxième
numéro et appuyez sur Nouvel appel ou sur [ ].
3. Appuyez sur Perm. pour passer d’un appel
à l’autre.
4. Pour mettre fin à un appel en attente,
appuyez sur Attente → .
5. Pour couper la communication, appuyez sur [ ].
Prendre un deuxième appel
Si votre réseau prend cette fonction en charge,
vous pouvez prendre un deuxième appel :
1. Appuyez sur [ ] pour prendre le deuxième
appel.
Le premier correspondant est
automatiquement mis en attente.
2. Appuyez sur Perm. pour passer d’un appel
à l’autre.
Organiser une conférence téléphonique
(appel à plusieurs)
1
1. Commencez par appeler le premier
participant à la conférence téléphonique.
2. Une fois le premier participant connecté,
appelez le deuxième.
Le premier participant est automatiquement
mis en attente.
1 Disponible uniquement si la fonction est prise en charge
par votre opérateur.38
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
3. Une fois le deuxième participant connecté,
appuyez sur Rejoindre.
4. Répétez les étapes 1 et 2 pour ajouter
d’autres participants (si nécessaire).
5. Pour terminer la conférence téléphonique,
appuyez sur [ ].
Appeler un numéro international
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur Clavier et
maintenez la touche 0 enfoncée pour insérer
le caractère +.
2. Entrez le numéro complet à composer
(indicatif national, indicatif régional si
nécessaire et numéro de téléphone), puis
appuyez sur → Appel vocal ou sur [ ]
pour appeler le numéro.
Appeler un contact depuis le répertoire
Vous pouvez appeler des numéros directement
depuis le répertoire à l’aide des contacts mis en
mémoire. X p. 30
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur Répertoire.
2. Sélectionnez le contact désiré.
3. Appuyez sur à côté du numéro → .
Utiliser les fonctions avancées
du répertoire
Découvrez comment créer des cartes de visite, définir
des numéros abrégés et créer des groupes de
contacts.
Créer une carte de visite
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur Répertoire →
Plus → Ma carte de visite.
2. Entrez vos informations personnelles.39
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
3. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
Définir les numéros favoris
1. En mode veille, appuyez sur Répertoire.
2. Appuyez sur le menu déroulant Répertoire →
Favoris.
3. Appuyez sur Ajouter.
4. Appuyez sur un chiffre et attribuez le contact
souhaité à ce chiffre.
Le contact est enregistré comme numéro favori.
Créer un groupe de contacts
En créant des groupes de contacts, vous pouvez
attribuer des noms de groupes, des sonneries, des
photos et un type de vibreur à chaque groupe, ou
envoyer des messages et des e-mails à l’intégralité
d’un groupe. Commencez par créer un groupe :
1. En mode Menu, appuyez sur Répertoire.
2. Appuyez sur le menu déroulant Répertoire →
Groupes.
3. Appuyez sur Créer un groupe.
4. Définissez un nom de groupe, la photo
d’identification une sonnerie de groupe
et un type de vibreur.
5. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
Vous pouvez envoyer votre carte de visite
en la joignant à un message ou à un e-mail
ou en la transférant au moyen de la
technologie Bluetooth sans fil.
Les 5 premiers numéros favoris
apparaîtront dans les contacts favoris ( )
de la barre d’outils des widgets.40
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
Utiliser les fonctions de messagerie
avancées
Apprenez à créer et à utiliser des modèles pour
rédiger de nouveaux messages et à créer un
dossier pour les messages.
Créer un modèle de SMS
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Messagerie →
Modèles → Modèles SMS.
2. Appuyez sur Créer pour ouvrir une nouvelle
fenêtre de modèle.
3. Sélectionnez le mode de saisie de texte.
4. Saisissez votre texte, puis appuyez sur OK.
5. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
Créer un modèle de MMS
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Messagerie →
Modèles → Modèles MMS.
2. Appuyez sur Créer pour ouvrir une nouvelle
fenêtre de modèle.
3. Créez un MMS comportant un objet et des
pièces jointes que vous utiliserez comme
modèle. X p. 26
4. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
Créer un message à partir d’un modèle
de SMS
1. Pour rédiger un nouveau message, en mode
Menu, sélectionnez Messagerie → Nouveau
message → un type de message.
2. Appuyez sur Plus → Insérer → Modèle SMS →
un modèle.41
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
Créer un message à partir d’un modèle
de MMS
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Messagerie →
Modèles → Modèles MMS.
2. Sélectionnez le modèle de votre choix.
3. Appuyez sur Arrêter, puis sur Envoyer.
Votre modèle s’ouvre sous forme de nouveau
MMS.
Créer un dossier pour gérer les
messages
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Messagerie →
Mes dossiers.
2. Appuyez sur Créer dossier.
3. Saisissez le nom du nouveau dossier, puis
appuyez sur OK.
Déplacez les messages du dossier Boîte de
réception vers vos dossiers pour les gérer
comme vous l’entendez.
Utiliser les fonctions avancées
de l’appareil photo
Découvrez comment prendre des photos dans
différents modes et personnaliser les réglages
de l’appareil photo.
Prendre des photos en utilisant des
options prédéfinies pour différentes scènes
1. Maintenez la touche Appareil photo enfoncée
l’appareil photo.
2. Basculez votre téléphone vers la gauche pour
un affichage en mode paysage.
3. Appuyez sur → une scène → .
4. Procédez aux réglages éventuels.
5. Pour prendre un cliché, appuyez sur la touche
Appareil photo.42
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
Prendre une série de photos
1. Maintenez la touche Appareil photo enfoncée
l’appareil photo.
2. Basculez votre téléphone vers la gauche pour
un affichage en mode paysage.
3. Appuyez sur → .
4. Procédez aux réglages éventuels.
5. Maintenez la touche Appareil photo enfoncée
pour prendre une série de photos.
Prendre des photos panoramiques
1. Maintenez la touche Appareil photo enfoncée
l’appareil photo.
2. Basculez votre téléphone vers la gauche pour
un affichage en mode paysage.
3. Appuyez sur → .
4. Procédez aux réglages éventuels.
5. Pour prendre la première photo, appuyez sur
la touche Appareil photo.
6. Déplacez lentement le téléphone vers la
droite. Le téléphone prend la photo suivante
automatiquement.
7. Répétez l’étape 6 pour terminer la photo
panoramique.
Prendre des photos en mode Sourire
1. Maintenez la touche Appareil photo enfoncée
l’appareil photo.
2. Basculez votre téléphone vers la gauche pour
un affichage en mode paysage.
3. Appuyez sur → .
4. Appuyez sur la touche Appareil photo.
5. Dirigez l’objectif de l’appareil photo vers votre
sujet. Votre téléphone reconnaît les visages
sur une image et détecte les sourires.43
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
Prendre des photos en mode mosaïque
1. Maintenez la touche Appareil photo enfoncée
l’appareil photo.
2. Basculez votre téléphone vers la gauche pour
un affichage en mode paysage.
3. Appuyez sur → .
4. Sélectionnez une disposition d’image.
5. Procédez aux réglages éventuels.
6. Appuyez sur la touche Appareil photo pour
prendre des photos pour chaque segment.
Prendre des photos avec des cadres
décoratifs
1. Maintenez la touche Appareil photo enfoncée
l’appareil photo.
2. Basculez votre téléphone vers la gauche pour
un affichage en mode paysage.
3. Appuyez sur → .
4. Sélectionnez un cadre.
5. Procédez aux réglages éventuels.
6. Appuyez sur la touche Appareil photo pour
prendre une photo avec le cadre.44
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
Utiliser les options de l’appareil photo et
du caméscope
Avant de prendre une photo, appuyez sur
pour accéder aux options suivantes :
Avant d’enregistrer une vidéo, appuyez sur
pour accéder aux options suivantes :
Personnaliser les paramètres de
l’appareil photo et du caméscope
Appuyez sur → pour accéder aux
fonctions suivantes :
Option Fonction
Résolution
Modifier les paramètres
de résolution
Effets Appliquer un effet spécial
Mesure expos.
Sélectionner un type d’indice
d’exposition
Qualité d’image
Régler la qualité de vos images
numériques
Option Fonction
Résolution
Modifier les paramètres
de résolution
Effets Appliquer un effet spécial
Qualité vidéo
Régler la qualité de vos
séquences vidéo
Configuration Fonction
Guide Afficher les instructions
Compte-rendu
Régler l’appareil photo pour
basculer vers l’écran d’aperçu,
après avoir pris des photos
Son de
l’obturateur
Sélectionner un son pour
accompagner l’action de l’obturateur
Enreg. audio
Activer ou désactiver
l’enregistrement du son
Option Fonction45
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
Fonctions avancées du lecteur MP3
Apprenez à préparer vos fichiers audio, à créer
vos listes de lecture et à enregistrer vos stations
de radio favorites.
Copier des fichiers audio via Samsung
PC Studio
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Paramètres →
Téléphone → Connexions PC → Samsung
PC Studio → Enregistrer.
2. Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le
connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre
téléphone et reliez-le à un ordinateur.
3. Lancez Samsung PC Studio et copiez les
fichiers depuis l’ordinateur vers le téléphone.
Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous
à l’aide de Samsung PC Studio.
Copier des fichiers audio sur une carte
mémoire
1. Insérez une carte mémoire.
2. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Paramètres →
Téléphone → Connexions PC → Stockage
de masse → Enregistrer.
3. Appuyez deux fois sur [ ] pour revenir
en mode veille.
Stockage
Sélectionner une mémoire de
stockage pour enregistrer de
nouvelles images ou vidéos
Configuration Fonction46
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
4. Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le
connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre
téléphone et reliez-le à un ordinateur.
Lorsque la connexion est établie, une fenêtre
contextuelle apparaît sur l’écran de l’ordinateur.
5. Sélectionnez Ouvrir le dossier pour afficher
les fichiers.
6. Copiez les fichiers depuis l’ordinateur vers
la carte mémoire.
Synchroniser le téléphone avec
le lecteur Windows Media
1. Insérez une carte mémoire.
2. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Paramètres →
Téléphone → Connexions PC → Lecteur
média → Enregistrer.
3. Appuyez deux fois sur [ ] pour revenir
en mode veille.
4. Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le
connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre
téléphone et reliez-le à un ordinateur.
Lorsque la connexion est établie, une fenêtre
contextuelle apparaît sur l’écran de l’ordinateur.
5. Ouvrez le lecteur Windows Media pour
synchroniser les fichiers audio.
6. Entrez ou modifiez le nom de votre téléphone
dans la fenêtre contextuelle (si nécessaire).
7. Sélectionnez les fichiers audio de votre choix et
faites-les glisser dans la liste de synchronisation.
8. Lancez la synchronisation.
Créer une liste de lecture
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Musique →
Lecteur MP3 → Listes de lecture.
2. Appuyez sur Créer.
3. Sélectionnez le mode de saisie de texte.47
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
4. Saisissez un titre pour votre nouvelle liste
de lecture, puis appuyez sur OK.
5. Pour attribuer une image à la liste de lecture,
appuyez sur App. pr modif. et sélectionnez
une photo existante ou prenez une nouvelle
photo.
6. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
7. Sélectionnez la nouvelle liste de lecture.
8. Appuyez sur Ajouter → Pistes.
9. Sélectionnez les fichiers à inclure et appuyez
sur Ajouter.
Personnaliser les paramètres
du lecteur MP3
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Musique →
Lecteur MP3.
2. Appuyez sur Paramètres.
3. Procédez aux réglages pour personnaliser
votre lecteur MP3.
4. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
Enregistrer des stations de radio
automatiquement
1. Branchez un kit piéton sur le connecteur
à fonctions multiples de votre téléphone.
2. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Radio FM.
Option Fonction
Musique
d’arrièreplan
Choisissez si vous souhaitez écouter
de la musique en arrière-plan lorsque
vous arrêtez le lecteur audio
Menu
musique
Sélectionnez les catégories
musicales à afficher sur l’écran
de la bibliothèque musicale48
Utilisation des fonctions avancées
3. Appuyez sur Plus → Recherche
automatique.
4. Appuyez sur Oui pour confirmer (si nécessaire).
La radio effectue un balayage et mémorise
automatiquement les stations disponibles.
Rechercher des informations sur
les chansons
Apprenez à accéder à distance à un service de
musique en ligne pour obtenir des informations
sur les chansons que vous écoutez.
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Musique →
Reconnaissance audio.
2. Appuyez sur Reconnaissance audio pour
vous connecter au serveur.
3. Lorsque votre téléphone est correctement
enregistré, appuyez sur pour enregistrer
une partie de la chanson que vous
recherchez.
Il est possible que certains opérateurs ne
prennent pas en charge ce service. D’autre
part, la base de données peut ne pas contenir
les informations relatives à la chanson que
vous recherchez.49
Outils et
applications
Apprenez à travailler avec les outils et les
applications supplémentaires fournis avec votre
téléphone.
Utiliser la technologie Bluetooth sans fil
Découvrez comment utiliser les fonctions permettant
à votre téléphone d’accéder à d’autres appareils
en vue d’échanger des données et de bénéficier
de fonctions mains libres.
Activer la fonction Bluetooth sans fil
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Bluetooth.
2. Appuyez sur le cercle au centre de l’écran
pour activer la technologie sans fil Bluetooth.
3. Pour permettre à d’autres périphériques
de localiser votre téléphone, sélectionnez
Réglages → ON dans Visibilité du
téléphone → une option de visibilité →
Enregistrer → Enregistrer.
Si vous avez sélectionné Personnaliser,
définissez la durée pendant laquelle votre
téléphone sera visible.50
Outils et applications
Rechercher d’autres périphériques
Bluetooth et les associer à votre
téléphone
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Bluetooth → Recherche.
2. Sélectionnez et faites glisser vers le centre
l’icone d’un périphérique.
3. Saisissez le code PIN Bluetooth ou le code PIN
de l’autre périphérique Bluetooth, le cas échéant,
et appuyez sur OK.
Lorsque l’utilisateur de l’autre périphérique entre
le même code PIN ou accepte la connexion,
l’association des deux appareils s’effectue.
Envoyer des données par Bluetooth
1. Sélectionnez le fichier ou l’élément à envoyer
depuis l’une des applications de votre téléphone.
2. Appuyez sur Envoyer via ou Envoyer l’URL
via → Bluetooth.
Recevoir des données par Bluetooth
1. Entrez le code PIN Bluetooth, puis appuyez
sur OK (si nécessaire).
2. Appuyez sur Oui pour confirmer la réception
des données depuis le périphérique
(si nécessaire).
Pour certains périphériques, il se peut que
vous n’ayez pas à saisir un code PIN.51
Outils et applications
Utiliser le mode SIM distant
En mode SIM à distance, vous pouvez passer
ou répondre à des appels uniquement avec un
kit mains libres Bluetooth pour voiture connecté
à la carte SIM de votre téléphone.
Pour activer le mode SIM distant :
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Bluetooth → Réglages.
2. Appuyez sur ON sous Mode SIM distant.
3. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
Pour utiliser le mode SIM distant, activez la
connexion Bluetooth depuis un kit mains libres
Bluetooth.
Activer et envoyer un message SOS
En cas d’urgence, vous pouvez envoyer un
message SOS et demander de l’aide.
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Messagerie →
Messages SOS → Options d’envoi.
2. Appuyez sur ON pour activer la fonction
d’envoi de messages SOS.
3. Appuyez sur le champ destinataires pour
ouvrir la liste des destinataires.
4. Appuyez sur Répertoire pour ouvrir la liste
des contacts.
5. Sélectionnez les contacts désirés et appuyez
sur Ajouter.
Le kit mains libres Bluetooth pour voiture
doit être autorisé. Pour l’autoriser,
sélectionnez le périphérique et appuyez sur
Activer connexion auto.
Cette fonction peut être indisponible selon
votre pays ou votre opérateur téléphonique.52
Outils et applications
6. Sélectionnez un numéro de téléphone
(si nécessaire).
7. Appuyez sur OK pour enregistrer
les destinataires.
8. Dans la rubrique Répéter, sélectionnez le
nombre de répétitions du message SOS.
9. Appuyez sur Enregistrer → Oui.
Pour envoyer un message SOS, l’écran tactile
et les touches doivent être verrouillées. Appuyez
quatre fois sur la touche [ / ].
Activer la fonction de traçage du mobile
Dès que quelqu’un insère une nouvelle carte SIM
dans votre téléphone, la fonction de traçage du
mobile envoie automatiquement le numéro du
contact aux destinataires que vous avez définis
pour vous aider à localiser et à récupérer votre
téléphone. Pour activer le traçage du mobile :
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Paramètres →
Sécurité → Traçage du mobile.
2. Entrez votre mot de passe, puis sélectionnez
Confirmer.
3. Appuyez sur ON pour activer le traçage
du mobile.
4. Appuyez sur le champ destinataires pour
ouvrir la liste des destinataires.
5. Appuyez sur le champ de saisie des
destinataires.
A partir du moment où un message SOS
a été envoyé, toutes les fonctions du
téléphone restent inaccessibles jusqu’à
ce que vous appuyiez sur la touche
Verrouillage.53
Outils et applications
6. Entrez un numéro de téléphone,
puis appuyez sur OK.
7. Appuyez une nouvelle fois sur OK pour
enregistrer les destinataires.
8. Appuyez sur le champ de saisie
de l’expéditeur.
9. Entrez le nom de l’expéditeur, puis
appuyez sur OK.
10.Appuyez sur Enregistrer → Accepter.
Simuler des appels
Vous pouvez simuler de faux appels lorsque
vous souhaitez quitter une réunion ou mettre fin à
une conversation. Vous pouvez également faire
croire que vous parlez au téléphone, avez un
correspondant en ligne en faisant passer une
voix enregistrée.
Enregistrer une voix
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Paramètres →
Applications → Appel → Appel simulé →
Appel vocal simulé.
2. Appuyez sur ON dans la rubrique Appel
vocal simulé.
3. Appuyez sur Mémo vocal.
4. Appuyez sur pour commencer
à enregistrer.
5. Parlez dans le microphone.
6. Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur .
7. Appuyez sur la touche Retour.
8. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.54
Outils et applications
Simuler un appel
Pour simuler un appel, maintenez la touche [ ]
enfoncée en mode veille.
Pour modifier le délai d’attente avant les faux appels,
en mode Menu, sélectionnez Paramètres →
Applications → Appel → Appel simulé → Durée
d’appel simulé → une option → Enregistrer.
Enregistrer et écouter des mémos
vocaux
Apprenez à utiliser l’enregistreur vocal de votre
téléphone.
Enregistrer un mémo vocal
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Mémo vocal.
2. Appuyez sur pour commencer à enregistrer.
3. Dictez votre mémo dans le microphone.
4. Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur .
Votre mémo est enregistré automatiquement.
Ecouter un mémo vocal
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Mes fichiers →
Sons → Mémos vocaux.
2. Sélectionnez un fichier.
3. Contrôlez la lecture des fichiers à l’aide des
icones suivantes :
Icone Fonction
Mettre en pause la lecture
Ecouter ou reprendre après une pause
Revenir en arrière dans le fichier
(maintenir enfoncée)
Avancer dans le fichier (maintenir
enfoncée)55
Outils et applications
Modifier des images
Découvrez comment modifier des images
et appliquer des effets spéciaux.
Appliquer des effets spéciaux à une image
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Mes fichiers →
Images → Mes photos → un fichier photo.
2. Appuyez sur .
3. Sélectionnez Modifier → Effets → un effet
spécial (filtre, style, déformer ou flou partiel).
4. Sélectionnez une variation de l’effet à appliquer
et appuyez sur OK.
Pour appliquer un effet flou à une zone spécifique
d’une image, déplacez ou redimensionnez le
rectangle et appuyez sur Flou → OK.
5. Lorsque que vous avez terminé l’application
des effets, appuyez sur Fichiers →
Enregistrer sous.
6. Sélectionnez une mémoire de stockage
(si nécessaire).
7. Donnez un nouveau nom à l’image
et appuyez sur OK.
Régler une image
1. Ouvrez une image à modifier. Consultez
les étapes 1 et 2 de « Appliquer des effets
spéciaux à une image ».
2. Sélectionnez Modifier → Ajuster → une option
de réglage (luminosité, contraste ou couleur).
Pour régler l’image automatiquement,
appuyez sur Niveau auto.
3. Réglez l’image selon vos souhaits
et appuyez sur OK.
4. Enregistrez l’image modifiée, sous un
nouveau nom de fichier. Consultez les étapes
5 et 7 de « Appliquer des effets spéciaux à
une image ».56
Outils et applications
Transformer une image
1. Ouvrez une image à modifier. Consultez
les étapes 1 et 2 de « Appliquer des effets
spéciaux à une image ».
2. Sélectionnez Modifier → Transformer →
Redimensionner, Pivoter ou Retourner.
3. Faites pivoter ou retournez l’image selon
vos souhaits et appuyez sur OK.
Pour redimensionner l’image, sélectionnez une
taille et appuyez sur Enregistrer → OK.
4. Enregistrez l’image modifiée, sous un nouveau
nom de fichier. Consultez les étapes 5 et 7 de
« Appliquer des effets spéciaux à une
image ».
Rogner une image
1. Ouvrez une image à modifier. Consultez
les étapes 1 et 2 de « Appliquer des effets
spéciaux à une image ».
2. Sélectionnez Modifier → Rogner.
3. Dessinez le rectangle sur la zone que vous
souhaitez rogner et appuyez sur Rogner →
OK.
4. Enregistrez l’image modifiée, sous un nouveau
nom de fichier. Consultez les étapes 5 et 7 de
« Appliquer des effets spéciaux à une
image ».
Insérer un effet visuel
1. Ouvrez une image à modifier. Consultez les
étapes 1 et 2 de « Appliquer des effets
spéciaux à une image ».
2. Sélectionnez Modifier → Insérer → un effet
visuel (cadre, image, clip art, émoticone ou texte).
3. Sélectionnez un effet visuel ou saisissez
du texte et appuyez sur OK.
4. Déplacez ou redimensionnez l’effet visuel
et appuyez sur OK.
5. Enregistrez l’image modifiée, sous un nouveau
nom de fichier. Consultez les étapes 5 et 7 de 57
Outils et applications
« Appliquer des effets spéciaux à une
image ».
Ajouter un mémo
1. Ouvrez une image à modifier. Consultez
les étapes 1 et 2 de « Appliquer des effets
spéciaux à une image ».
2. Sélectionnez Modifier → Mémo à l’écran.
3. Choisissez une couleur, rédigez un mémo
à l’écran et appuyez sur OK.
4. Enregistrez l’image modifiée, sous un nouveau
nom de fichier. Consultez les étapes 5 et 7 de
« Appliquer des effets spéciaux à une
image ».
Imprimer des images
Découvrez comment imprimer des images avec une
connexion USB ou la technologie sans fil Bluetooth.
Pour imprimer une image en utilisant une
connexion USB :
1. Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le
connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre
téléphone et reliez-le à une imprimante
compatible.
2. Ouvrez une image. X p. 32
3. Sélectionnez Plus → Imprimer via → USB.
4. Définissez les options d’impression et imprimez
l’image.
Pour imprimer une image à l’aide de la technologie
sans fil Bluetooth :
1. Ouvrez une image. X p. 32
2. Sélectionnez Plus → Imprimer via →
Bluetooth.
3. Sélectionnez une imprimante compatible
Bluetooth et connectez-vous à l’imprimante.
X p. 50
4. Définissez les options d’impression
et imprimez l’image.58
Outils et applications
Charger des photos et des vidéos
sur le Web
Découvrez comment publier vos photos et vidéos
sur des sites Web et des blogs de partage.
Définir votre liste de destinations favorites
1. En mode Menu, appuyez sur Communities.
2. Appuyez sur Oui pour définir votre liste
de destinations favorites (si nécessaire).
3. Appuyez sur Accepter pour confirmer que
vous acceptez la clause de nonresponsabilité.
4. Cochez les destinations à ajouter
et appuyez sur Enregistrer.
Si vous avez sélectionné MAJ listes, les
nouveaux sites de destination viennent
s’ajouter automatiquement à la liste.
Charger un fichier
Pour charger des photos et des vidéos, vous
devez posséder des comptes sur des blogs
et des sites de partage de photos.
1. En mode Menu, appuyez sur Communities.
2. Sélectionnez une destination à laquelle
l’envoyer.
3. Saisissez le nom d’utilisateur et le mot
de passe de la destination.
Il se peut que Communities soit indisponible
en fonction de votre pays ou votre opérateur
téléphonique.
Lorsque vous utilisez Communities pour la
première fois, vous êtes invité à confirmer.
Pour modifier la liste de destinations favorites
ou mettre à jour les listes, dans l’écran
Communities, sélectionnez Paramètres →
Listes favorites → Modifier.59
Outils et applications
4. Appuyez sur Appuyez pour ajouter
et sélectionnez un fichier.
5. Entrez les informations de publication
et appuyez sur Télécharger.
Utiliser les jeux et applications Java
Découvrez comment utiliser les jeux et applications
fonctionnant grâce à la technologie Java primée.
Télécharger des jeux ou des applications
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Jeux et autres → Plus de jeux.
Votre téléphone se connecte au site Web
prédéfini par votre opérateur.
2. Recherchez un jeu ou une application
et téléchargez vers le téléphone.
Jeux
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Jeux et autres.
2. Sélectionnez un jeu dans la liste et suivez
les instructions qui s’affichent.
Le téléchargement de fichiers java peut
ne pas être pris en charge en fonction
du logiciel installé sur le téléphone.
La liste des jeux disponibles peut varier
en fonction de votre opérateur téléphonique
ou de votre région. Les commandes et les
options des jeux sont elles aussi susceptibles
de varier.60
Outils et applications
Lancer des applications
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Jeux et autres → une application.
2. Appuyez sur Plus pour accéder à la liste des
options et des réglages de votre application.
Synchroniser des données
Découvrez comment synchroniser des contacts,
événements du calendrier, tâches et mémos,
avec le serveur Web désigné.
Créer un profil de synchronisation
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Synchroniser.
2. Appuyez sur Ajouter et renseignez
les paramètres du profil.
3. Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur
Enregistrer.
Lancer la synchronisation
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Synchroniser.
2. Sélectionnez un profil de synchronisation.
3. Appuyez sur Continuer pour lancer la
synchronisation avec le serveur Web désigné.
Utiliser un lecteur RSS
Découvrez comment utiliser un lecteur RSS pour
recevoir les dernières informations de vos sites
Web favoris.
Ajouter l’adresse d’un flux RSS
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Lecteur RSS.
2. Appuyez sur Ajouter.
3. Appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’URL.
4. Saisissez l’adresse d’un flux RSS
et appuyez sur OK.61
Outils et applications
Lire les flux RSS
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Lecteur RSS.
2. Appuyez sur Mise à jour pour obtenir
les contenus les plus récents.
3. Choisissez une catégorie de flux →
un flux mis à jour.
Créer et afficher des horloges
mondiales
Découvrez comment afficher l’heure d’une autre
région du monde et afficher les fuseaux horaires
à l’écran.
Afficher une horloge mondiale
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Horloge mondiale.
2. Faites défiler la carte du monde et sélectionnez
un fuseau horaire.
Créer une horloge mondiale
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Horloge mondiale.
2. Appuyez sur → Ajouter.
3. Choisissez un fuseau horaire.
4. Pour régler l’heure d’été, appuyez sur .
La fonction de mise à jour automatique permet
d’actualiser automatiquement les flux RSS
à l’intervalle prédéfini. Vous pouvez activer
la fonction de mise à jour automatique
en sélectionnant Lecteur RSS → Plus →
Paramètres → Préférences.62
Outils et applications
5. Appuyez sur OK pour créer votre horloge
mondiale.
L’horloge mondiale est définie comme
deuxième horloge.
6. Appuyez sur Ajouter pour ajouter d’autres
horloges mondiales (étape 3).
Ajouter une deuxième horloge
Avec le widget à deux horloges, vous pouvez
visualiser deux fuseaux horaires différents à
l’écran.
Une fois que vous avez créé une horloge
mondiale, procédez comme suit :
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Horloge mondiale.
2. Appuyez sur → 2ème horloge.
3. Sélectionnez l’horloge mondiale à ajouter.
4. Appuyez sur Appliquer.
Paramétrer et utiliser des alarmes
Apprenez à configurer des alarmes pour ne plus
oublier les événements importants.
Créer une nouvelle alarme
1. En mode Menu, appuyez sur Alarmes.
2. Appuyez sur Créer une alarme.
3. Réglez les détails de l’alarme.
4. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
La fonction d’activation automatique permet
de faire sonner l’alarme à l’heure indiquée
même si le téléphone est éteint.63
Outils et applications
Arrêter une alarme
Lorsque l’alarme sonne :
• Faites glisser le curseur vers Arrêter pour
arrêter l’alarme sans pour autant annuler sa
répétition.
• Faites glisser le curseur vers Arrêter pour
arrêter l’alarme et sa répétition, ou faites
glisser le curseur vers Répétition pour couper
la sonnerie durant la période de répétition.
Désactiver une alarme
1. En mode Menu, appuyez sur Alarmes.
2. Appuyez sur OFF sous l’alarme à désactiver.
Utiliser la calculatrice
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Calculatrice.
2. Utilisez les touches correspondant à l’écran
de la calculatrice pour effectuer des
opérations mathématiques de base.
Convertisseur
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Convertisseur → un type de conversion.
2. Entrez les devises ou les mesures et les
unités dans les champs correspondants.64
Outils et applications
Régler un compte à rebours
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Minuteur.
2. Entrez les heures, les minutes et/ou
les secondes du compte à rebours.
3. Appuyez sur Démarrer pour lancer le compte
à rebours.
4. À la fin du décompte, faites glisser le curseur
vers Arrêter pour arrêter les alertes.
Utiliser le chronomètre
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Applications →
Chronomètre.
2. Appuyez sur Démarrer pour lancer
le chronomètre.
3. Appuyez sur Tour pour enregistrer les temps
de passage.
4. Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur
Arrêter.
5. Appuyez sur Réinit. pour effacer les temps
enregistrés.65
Outils et applications
Créer une nouvelle tâche
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Tâche.
2. Appuyez sur Nouvelle tâche.
3. Entrez les détails de la tâche et appuyez sur
Enregistrer.
Créer un mémo texte
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Mémo.
2. Appuyez sur Nouveau mémo.
3. Saisissez le texte du mémo, puis appuyez
sur OK.
Gérer le calendrier
Découvrez comment modifier le mode
d’affichage du calendrier et créer des
événements.
Modifier le mode d’affichage du
calendrier
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Calendrier.
2. Appuyez sur Plus → Vue Jour ou Vue
Semaine.
Créer un événement
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Calendrier.
2. Appuyez sur Créer.
3. Entrez les détails de l’événement.
4. Appuyez sur Enregistrer.66
Outils et applications
Afficher les événements
Pour afficher les événements correspondant
à une date spécifique :
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Calendrier.
2. Choisissez une date sur le calendrier.
3. Sélectionnez un événement pour afficher ses
détails.
Pour afficher les événements par type
d’événements :
1. En mode Menu, sélectionnez Organiseur →
Calendrier.
2. Sélectionner Evénement.
3. Appuyez sur un événement pour afficher
ses détails.a
Dépannage
Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec votre téléphone portable, tentez d’abord de les résoudre vous-même
en vous aidant des procédures suivantes avant de faire appel à un professionnel.
Lorsque vous utilisez votre téléphone, les
messages suivants peuvent apparaître :
Message Solution
Insérez une
carte SIM
pour accéder
aux services
réseau
Assurez-vous que la carte SIM
est correctement installée.
Verrouillage
téléphone
Si la fonction Verrouillage
téléphone est activée, vous devez
saisir le mot de passe de
l’appareil.
Code PIN
Si vous utilisez votre téléphone
pour la première fois ou si le
code PIN vous est demandé, vous
devez saisir le code PIN fourni
avec la carte SIM. Vous pouvez
désactiver cette fonction en
utilisant le menu Verrouillage
PIN.
Code PIN2
Lorsque vous accédez à un menu
vous demandant le code PIN2,
vous devez entrer le code PIN2
fourni par la carte SIM.
Message Solutionb
Dépannage
Votre téléphone affiche « Service non disponible »
ou « Erreur réseau ».
• Vous vous trouvez peut-être dans une zone de
signal faible ou de mauvaise réception, si bien
que vous pouvez être amené à perdre votre
réception. Déplacez-vous et recommencez.
• Certaines options sont indisponibles sans
abonnement. Contactez votre opérateur
téléphonique pour obtenir des informations
complémentaires.
Vous avez composé un numéro mais l’appel
n’a pas abouti.
• Vérifiez que vous avez effectivement appuyé
sur la touche d’appel : [ ].
• Vérifiez que vous avez accès au réseau
cellulaire approprié.
• Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas interdit ce type
d’appels.
Un correspondant ne parvient pas à vous joindre.
• Vérifiez que votre téléphone portable est
allumé.
• Vérifiez que vous avez accès au réseau
cellulaire approprié.
• Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas interdit ce type
d’appels.
Votre correspondant ne vous entend pas.
• Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas bloqué l’accès au
micro intégré du téléphone.
Code PUK
Votre carte SIM est bloquée,
vraisemblablement du fait de trop
nombreuses saisies incorrectes
de votre code PIN. Saisissez
le code PUK fourni par votre
opérateur.
Message Solutionc
Dépannage
• Positionnez le micro près de votre bouche.
• Si vous utilisez l’oreillette, vérifiez qu’elle est
correctement branchée.
Le téléphone émet des bips répétés et l’icone
de la batterie clignote.
Votre batterie est faible. Rechargez-la ou
remplacez-la pour pouvoir continuer à utiliser
votre téléphone.
La qualité sonore de l’appel est mauvaise.
• Vérifiez que rien ne bloque l’antenne interne
du téléphone.
• Vous vous trouvez peut-être dans une zone de
signal faible ou de mauvaise réception, si bien
que vous pouvez être amené à perdre votre
réception. Déplacez-vous et recommencez.
Vous avez sélectionné le numéro du correspondant
à appeler mais l’appel n’a pas abouti.
• Vérifiez que le numéro est correct et qu’il est
bien enregistré dans la liste des contacts.
• Si nécessaire, saisissez et enregistrez
à nouveau le numéro.
La batterie ne se recharge pas correctement
ou le téléphone s’éteint parfois tout seul.
• Les bornes de la batterie sont peut-être sales.
Nettoyez les deux contacts dorés à l’aide d’un
chiffon doux et propre et essayez à nouveau
de charger la batterie.
• Si la recharge de votre batterie ne s’effectue
toujours pas entièrement, jetez votre ancienne
batterie en suivant les consignes de recyclage
en vigueur et remplacez-la par une nouvelle
batterie.
Votre téléphone est chaud au toucher.
Lorsque vous utilisez plusieurs applications en
même temps, votre téléphone a besoin de plus
de puissance et peut chauffer.
Ce phénomène est normal et ne devrait pas
affecter la durée de vie ou les performances
de votre téléphone.d
Index
alarmes
arrêter, 63
créer, 62
désactiver, 63
appels
afficher les appels manqués, 36
conférence téléphonique, 37
depuis le répertoire, 38
émettre, 25
fonctions d’appel avancées, 36
fonctions d’appel de base, 25
mettre en attente, 37
numéro international, 38
numéros récemment
composés, 36
passer un deuxième appel, 37
prendre un deuxième appel, 37
rappeler les appels
manqués, 36
répondre, 25
reprendre un appel mis
en attente, 37
simuler des appels, 53
appels à plusieurs
voir appels, conférence
téléphonique
batterie
installer, 16
mettre en charge, 18
témoin de faible charge, 18
Bluetooth
activer, 49
envoyer des données, 50
mode SIM distant, 51
recevoir des données, 50
calculatrice
voir outils, calculatrice
calendrier
voir outils, calendrier
carte de visite 38
carte mémoire 19
carte SIM 16
chronomètre
voir outils, chronomètree
Index
Communities
voir outils, blog mobile
compte à rebours
voir outils, compte à rebours
contacts
ajouter, 30
créer un groupe, 39
rechercher, 30
convertisseur
voir outils, convertisseur
fond d’écran 24
horloge
voir horloge mondiale
horloge mondiale
afficher, 61
ajouter, 62
créer, 61
images
ajouter un mémo, 57
appliquer des effets
spéciaux, 55
imprimer, 57
insérer un effet visuel, 56
régler, 55
rogner, 56
transformer, 56
Internet
voir navigateur Web
Java
jeux, 59
lancer des applications, 60
télécharger, 59
lecteur audio
créer une liste de lecture, 46
personnaliser, 47
synchroniser, 46
lecteur MP3
écouter des fichiers audio, 34
lecteur RSS
voir outils, lecteur RSS
mémo
voir texte ou mémos vocaux
mémos vocaux
écouter, 54
enregistrer, 54
message SOS 51
messages
envoyer un e-mail, 27
envoyer un MMS, 26
envoyer un SMS, 26
lire un e-mail, 29
lire un MMS, 29
lire un SMS, 29f
Index
MMS
voir messages
modèles
insérer, 40
MMS, 40
SMS, 40
navigateur
voir navigateur web
navigateur Web
favoris, 35
lancer la page d’accueil, 35
oreillette 26
outils
alarme, 62
blog mobile, 58
calculatrice, 63
calendrier, 65
chronomètre, 64
compte à rebours, 64
convertisseur, 63
éditeur d’images, 55
lecteur RSS, 60
tâche, 65
photos
afficher, 32
fonctions avancées, 41
prendre, 31
profil Discret 24
profil Hors-ligne 20
radio
voir radio FM
radio FM
écouter, 33
enregistrer une station, 47
reconnaissance audio 48
retardateur
voir outils, compte à rebours
SMS
messages, 26
sonnerie 24
synchronisation
créer un profil, 60
lancer, 60
texte
créer un mémo, 65
saisir, 27
traçage du mobile 52
verrouiller le téléphone 25
vidéos
enregistrer, 32
visionner, 33g
Index
volume
volume d’écoute, 26
volume des touches, 24
widgets 22
Windows Media Player 46Déclaration de conformité (R&TTE)
Nous, Samsung Electronics
déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité que le produit
Téléphone mobile GSM : GT-S5230
en relation avec cette déclaration est en conformité avec les normes suivantes et/ou
d’autres documents normatifs.
SAFETY EN 60950- 1 : 2001 +A11:2004
EMC EN 301 489- 01 V1.6.1 (09-2005)
EN 301 489- 07 V1.3.1 (11-2005)
EN 301 489- 17 V1.2.1 (08-2002)
SAR EN 50360 : 2001
EN 62209-1 : 2006
RADIO EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003)
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006)
Ce téléphone a été testé et s’est avéré conforme aux normes relatives à l’émission
de fréquences radio. En outre, nous déclarons que cet appareil répond à la directive
1999/5/EC.
La procédure de déclaration de conformité, définie dans l’article 10, puis reprise
à l’alinéa [IV] de la directive 1999/5/EC a été conduite sous contrôle de l’organisme
suivant :
BABT, Balfour House, Churchfield Road,
Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK*
Numéro d’identification : 0168
Documentation technique détenue par :
Samsung Electronics QA Lab.
disponible sur simple demande.
(Représentant pour l’union européenne)
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way,
Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK*
2009.04.01 Yong-Sang Park / S. Manager
(lieu et date de parution) (nom et signature du responsable dûment habilité)
* Cette adresse n’est pas celle du Centre de service de Samsung. Pour obtenir celle-ci,
consultez la carte de la garantie ou contactez le revendeur de votre téléphone.Selon le logiciel installé sur votre téléphone ou votre opérateur téléphonique, certaines descriptions de ce mode
d’emploi peuvent ne pas correspondre fidèlement à votre téléphone.
World Wide Web
http://www.samsungmobile.com
Printed in Korea
Code No.: GH68-22883A
French. 04/2009. Rev. 1.0
Une écoute au casque peut détériorer votre audition
si le volume d’écoute est trop élevé. Veillez à régler
le volume au niveau minimal permettant d’entendre
la conversation ou la musique.
GT-S5230
user manualii
using this
manual
This user manual has been specially
designed to guide you through the functions and
features of your mobile phone. To get started quickly,
refer to “introducing your mobile phone,”
“assembling and preparing your mobile phone,”
and “using basic functions.”
Instructional icons
Before you start, familiarise yourself with the icons
you will see in this manual:
Warning—situations that could cause
injury to yourself or others
Caution—situations that could cause
damage to your phone or other equipment
Note—notes, usage tips, or additional
information
X Refer to—pages with related information;
for example: X p.12 (represents “see page
12”)using this manual
iii
Copyright information
Rights to all technologies and products that
comprise this device are the property of their
respective owners:
• Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of the
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide.
Bluetooth QD ID: B015178.
• Java™ is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
• Windows Media Player® is a registered trademark
of Microsoft Corporation.
→ Followed by—the order of options or
menus you must select to perform a step;
for example: In Menu mode, select
Messages → Create message (represents
Messages, followed by Create message)
[ ] Square brackets—phone keys; for
example: [ ] (represents the Power/Menu
exit key)iv
contents
safety and usage information .................. 1
Safety warnings ..........................................1
Safety precautions ......................................3
Important usage information .......................6
introducing your mobile phone ............. 11
Unpack .....................................................11
Phone layout .............................................12
Keys .........................................................13
Display ......................................................13
Icons .........................................................14
assembling and preparing your
mobile phone ..........................................16
Install the SIM card and battery .................16
Charge the battery ....................................18
Insert a memory card (optional) .................19contents
v
using basic functions ............................ 20
Turn your phone on and off .......................20
Use the touch screen ................................21
Access menus ..........................................22
Use widgets ..............................................22
Access help information ............................23
Customise your phone ..............................23
Use basic call functions ............................24
Send and view messages .........................26
Add and find contacts ...............................29
Use basic camera functions ......................29
Listen to music .........................................31
Browse the web ........................................33
using advanced functions ..................... 34
Use advanced call functions ..................... 34
Use advanced phonebook functions .........36
Use advanced messaging functions ..........37
Use advanced camera functions ............... 39
Use advanced music functions .................42
using tools and applications ................. 45
Use the Bluetooth wireless feature ............ 45
Activate and send an SOS message .........47
Activate the mobile tracker ........................48
Make fake calls .........................................48
Record and play voice memos .................. 49
Edit images ............................................... 50vi
contents
Print images ..............................................52
Upload photos and videos to the web .......52
Use Java-powered games and
applications ..............................................54
Synchronise data ......................................55
Use RSS reader ........................................55
Create and view world clocks ...................56
Set and use alarms ...................................57
Use the calculator .....................................58
Convert currencies or measurements ........58
Set a countdown timer ..............................58
Use the stopwatch ....................................58
Create a new task .....................................58
Create a text memo ..................................59
Manage your calendar ..............................59
troubleshooting ........................................ a
index .........................................................d1
safety and
usage
information
Comply with the following precautions to avoid
dangerous or illegal situations and ensure peak
performance of your mobile phone.
Keep your phone away from small
children and pets
Keep your phone and all accessories out of the
reach of small children or animals. Small parts may
cause choking or serious injury if swallowed.
Protect your hearing
Safety warnings
Listening to a headset at high volumes can
damage your hearing. Use only the
minimum volume setting necessary to hear
your conversation or music.2
safety and usage information
Install mobile phones and equipment
with caution
Ensure that any mobile phones or related equipment
installed in your vehicle are securely mounted. Avoid
placing your phone and accessories near or in an air
bag deployment area. Improperly installed wireless
equipment can cause serious injury when air bags
inflate rapidly.
Handle and dispose of batteries and
chargers with care
• Use only Samsung-approved batteries and
chargers specifically designed for your phone.
Incompatible batteries and chargers can cause
serious injuries or damage to your phone.
• Never dispose of batteries or phones in a fire.
Follow all local regulations when disposing used
batteries or phones.
• Never place batteries or phones on or in heating
devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or
radiators. Batteries may explode when
overheated.
• Never crush or puncture the battery. Avoid
exposing the battery to high external pressure,
which can lead to an internal short circuit and
overheating.
Avoid interference with pacemakers
Maintain a minimum of 15 cm (6 inches) between
mobile phones and pacemakers to avoid potential
interference, as recommended by manufacturers
and the independent research group, Wireless
Technology Research. If you have any reason to
suspect that your phone is interfering with a
pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the
phone immediately and contact the manufacturer of
the pacemaker or medical device for guidance.safety and usage information
3
Turn off the phone in potentially
explosive environments
Do not use your phone at refuelling points (service
stations) or near fuels or chemicals. Turn off your
phone whenever directed by warning signs or
instructions. Your phone could cause explosions or
fire in and around fuel or chemical storage and
transfer areas or blasting areas. Do not store or carry
flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in
the same compartment as the phone, its parts, or
accessories.
Reduce the risk of repetitive motion
injuries
While using your phone, hold the phone with a
relaxed grip, press the keys lightly, use special
features that reduce the number of keys you have to
press (such as templates and predictive text), and
take frequent breaks.
Drive safely at all times
Avoid using your phone while driving and obey all
regulations that restrict the use of mobile phones
while driving. Use hands-free accessories to
increase your safety when possible.
Follow all safety warnings and
regulations
Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a
mobile phone in a certain area.
Use only Samsung-approved
accessories
Using incompatible accessories may damage your
phone or cause injury.
Safety precautions4
safety and usage information
Turn off the phone near medical
equipment
Your phone can interfere with medical equipment in
hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all
regulations, posted warnings, and directions from
medical personnel.
Turn off the phone or disable the
wireless functions when in an aircraft
Your phone can cause interference with aircraft
equipment. Follow all airline regulations and turn off
your phone or switch to a mode that disables the
wireless functions when directed by airline
personnel.
Protect batteries and chargers from
damage
• Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot
temperatures (below 0° C/32° F or above 45° C/
113° F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the
charging capacity and life of your batteries.
• Prevent batteries from contacting metal objects,
as this can create a connection between the +
and - terminals of your batteries and lead to
temporary or permanent battery damage.
• Never use a damaged charger or battery.
Handle your phone carefully and
sensibly
• Do not allow your phone to get wet—liquids can
cause serious damage. Do not handle your
phone with wet hands. Water damage to your
phone can void your manufacturer’s warranty.safety and usage information
5
• Avoid using or storing your phone in dusty, dirty
areas to prevent damage to moving parts.
• Your phone is a complex electronic device—
protect it from impacts and rough handling to
avoid serious damage.
• Do not paint your phone, as paint can clog
moving parts and prevent proper operation.
• If your phone has a camera flash or light, avoid
using it close to the eyes of children or animals.
• Your phone may be damaged by exposure to
magnetic fields. Do not use carrying cases or
accessories with magnetic closures or allow your
phone to come in contact with magnetic fields for
extended periods of time.
Avoid interference with other electronic
devices
Your phone emits radio frequency (RF) signals that
may interfere with unshielded or improperly shielded
electronic equipment, such as pacemakers, hearing
aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices
in homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of
your electronic devices to solve any interference
problems you experience.6
safety and usage information
Use your phone in the normal position
Avoid contact with your phone’s internal antenna.
Allow only qualified personnel to service
your phone
Allowing unqualified personnel to service your phone
may result in damage to your phone and will void
your warranty.
Ensure maximum battery and charger
life
• Avoid charging batteries for more than a week, as
overcharging may shorten battery life.
• Over time, unused batteries will discharge and
must be recharged before use.
• Disconnect chargers from power sources when
not in use.
• Use batteries only for their intended purpose.
Handle SIM cards and memory cards
with care
• Do not remove a card while the phone is
transferring or accessing information, as this
could result in loss of data and/or damage to the
card or phone.
• Protect cards from strong shocks, static
electricity, and electrical noise from other devices.
• Frequent writing and erasing will shorten the life
span of memory cards.
• Do not touch gold-coloured contacts or terminals
with your fingers or metal objects. If dirty, wipe the
card with a soft cloth.
Important usage informationsafety and usage information
7
Ensure access to emergency services
Emergency calls from your phone may not be
possible in some areas or circumstances. Before
travelling in remote or undeveloped areas, plan an
alternate method of contacting emergency services
personnel.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
certification information
Your phone conforms to European Union (EU)
standards that limit human exposure to radio
frequency (RF) energy emitted by radio and
telecommunications equipment. These standards
prevent the sale of mobile phones that exceed a
maximum exposure level (known as the Specific
Absorption Rate, or SAR) of 2.0 watts per kilogram
of body tissue.
During testing, the maximum SAR recorded for this
model was 0.531 watts per kilogram. In normal use,
the actual SAR is likely to be much lower, as the
phone has been designed to emit only the RF
energy necessary to transmit a signal to the nearest
base station. By automatically emitting lower levels
when possible, your phone reduces your overall
exposure to RF energy.
The Declaration of Conformity at the back of this
manual demonstrates your phone’s compliance with
the European Radio & Terminal Telecommunications
Equipment (R&TTE) directive. For more information
about the SAR and related EU standards, visit the
Samsung mobile phone website.8
safety and usage information
Correct disposal of this product
(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and
other European countries with separate
collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories
or literature indicates that the product and
its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset,
USB cable) should not be disposed of with other
household waste at the end of their working life. To
prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please
separate these items from other types of waste and
recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable
reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer
where they purchased this product, or their local
government office, for details of where and how they
can take these items for environmentally safe
recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and
check the terms and conditions of the purchase
contract. This product and its electronic accessories
should not be mixed with other commercial wastes
for disposal.safety and usage information
9
Correct disposal of batteries in this
product
(Applicable in the European Union and
other European countries with separate
battery return systems)
This marking on the battery, manual or
packaging indicates that the batteries in this product
should not be disposed of with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked,
the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the
battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above
the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If
batteries are not properly disposed of, these
substances can cause harm to human health or the
environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material
reuse, please separate batteries from other types of
waste and recycle them through your local, free
battery return system.
Disclaimer
Some content and services accessible through this
device belong to third parties and are protected by
copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual
property laws. Such content and services are
provided solely for your personal noncommercial
use. You may not use any content or services in a
manner that has not been authorized by the content
owner or service provider. Without limiting the
foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the
applicable content owner or service provider, you
may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post,
transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works,
exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any
content or services displayed through this device.10
safety and usage information
“THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS." SAMSUNG DOES NOT
WARRANT COTENT OR SERVICES SO PROVIDED,
EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY
PURPOSE. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE
ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR
COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE
MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES,
EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT
OF THE USE OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE BY
YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES."
Third party services may be terminated or interrupted
at any time, and Samsung makes no representation
or warranty that any content or service will remain
available for any period of time. Content and
services are transmitted by third parties by means of
networks and transmission facilities over which
Samsung has no control. Without limiting the
generality of this disclaimer, Samsung expressly
disclaims any responsibility or liability for any
interruption or suspension of any content or service
made available through this device.
Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for
customer service related to the content and
services. Any question or request for service relating
to the content or services should be made directly to
the respective content and service providers.11
introducing your
mobile phone
In this section, learn about your mobile phone’s
layout, keys, display, and icons.
Unpack
Check your product box for the following items:
• Mobile phone
• Battery
• Travel adapter (charger)
• User manual
The items supplied with your phone may vary
depending on the software and accessories
available in your region or offered by your
service provider. You can obtain additional
accessories from your local Samsung dealer. 12
introducing your mobile phone
Phone layout
The front of your phone includes the following keys
and features:
The rear of your phone includes the following keys
and features:
Power/Menu
exit key
Dial key
Touch screen
Earpiece
Back key
Mouthpiece
Multifunction
jack
Volume key
You can lock the touch screen and keys to
prevent any unwanted phone operations. To
lock, press the Hold key.
Battery cover
Camera lens
Camera key Internal
antenna
Hold key
Mirrorintroducing your mobile phone
13
Keys Display
Your phone’s display consists of the following areas:
Key Function
Dial
Make or answer a call; In Idle mode,
retrieve recently dialled, missed, or
received numbers
Back
In Menu mode, return to the previous
level
Power/
Menu exit
Turn the phone on and off (press and
hold); End a call; In Menu mode,
return to the main menu screen or
return to Idle mode
Volume Adjust the phone’s volume
Hold
Lock or unlock the touch screen and
keys
Camera
In Idle mode, turn on the camera; In
Camera mode, take a photo or
record a video
Icon line
Displays various icons
Text and graphic area
Displays messages,
instructions, and
information you enter14
introducing your mobile phone
Icons
Learn about the icons that appear on your display.
Icon Definition
Signal strength
GPRS network connected
Transferring data via GPRS network
EDGE network connected
Transferring data via EDGE network
Voice call in progress
Memory card inserted
Alarm activated
Browsing the web
Connected to secured web page
Roaming (outside of normal service area)
Call diverting activated
Bluetooth activated
Bluetooth hands-free car kit or headset
connected
Synchronised with PC
New text message (SMS)
New multimedia message (MMS)
New email message
New voice mail message
Icon Definitionintroducing your mobile phone
15
Normal profile activated
Silent profile activated
Battery power level
Current time
Icon Definition16
assembling and
preparing your
mobile phone
Get started by assembling and setting up
your mobile phone for its first use.
Install the SIM card and battery
When you subscribe to a cellular service, you will
receive a Subscriber Identity Module, or SIM card,
with subscription details, such as your personal
identification number (PIN) and optional services.
To install the SIM card and battery,
1. Remove the battery cover.
If the phone is on, press and hold [ ] to turn
it off.assembling and preparing your mobile phone
17
2. Insert the SIM card. 3. Insert the battery.
• Place the SIM card in the phone with the 4. Replace the battery cover.
gold-coloured contacts facing down.
• Without inserting a SIM card, you can use
your phone’s non-network services and
some menus.18
assembling and preparing your mobile phone
Charge the battery
Before using the phone for the first time, you must
charge the battery.
1. Open the cover to the multifunction jack on the
side of the phone.
2. Plug the small end of the travel adapter into the
multifunction jack.
3. Plug the large end of the travel adapter into a
power outlet.
4. When the battery is fully charged (the icon is
no longer moving), unplug the travel adapter from
the power outlet.
5. Unplug the travel adapter from the phone.
6. Close the cover to the multifunction jack.
Improperly connecting the travel adapter can
cause serious damage to the phone. Any
damages by misuse are not covered by the
warranty.
With the triangle facing up
About the low battery indicator
When your battery is low, the phone will emit a
warning tone and a low battery message. The
battery icon will also be empty and blinking. If
the battery level becomes too low, the phone
will automatically power off. Recharge your
battery to continue using your phone.assembling and preparing your mobile phone
19
Insert a memory card (optional)
To store additional multimedia files, you must insert a
memory card. Your phone accepts microSD™
memory cards up to 8 GB (depending on memory
card manufacturer and type).
1. Remove the battery cover and battery.
2. Insert a memory card with the label side facing
down.
3. Push the memory card in the memory card slot
until it locks in place.
4. Insert the battery and replace the battery cover.
To remove the memory card, remove the battery
cover and battery, and then pull the memory card
out of the memory card slot.20
using basic
functions
Learn how to perform basic operations and use the
main features of your mobile phone.
Turn your phone on and off
To turn your phone on,
1. Press and hold [ ].
2. Enter your PIN and select Confirm (if necessary).
To turn your phone off, repeat step 1 above.
Switch to the offline profile
By switching to the offline profile, you can use your
phone’s non-network services in areas where
wireless devices are prohibited, such as aeroplanes
and hospitals.
To switch to the offline profile, in Menu mode, select
Settings → Phone profiles → Offline.
Follow all posted warnings and directions from
official personnel when in areas where wireless
devices are prohibited.21
using basic functions
Use the touch screen
You can perform the following actions on your
phone’s touch screen:
Learn basic actions to use the touch screen.
• Select an icon to open a menu or launch an
application.
• Drag your finger up or down to scroll through
vertical lists.
• Drag your finger left or right to scroll through
horizontal lists.
For the optimal use of the touch screen,
remove the screen protection film before using
your phone.22
using basic functions
Access menus
To access your phone’s menus,
1. In Idle mode, select Menu to access Menu
mode.
2. Select a menu or option.
3. Press the Back key to move up one level; Press
[ ] twice to return to Idle mode.
Use widgets
Learn to use widgets on the widget toolbar.
Open the widget toolbar
In Idle mode, select the arrow at the bottom left of
the screen to open the widget toolbar. You can
rearrange widgets on the widget toolbar or move
them to the idle screen.
Add the widgets to the idle screen
1. Open the widget toolbar.
2. Drag a widget from the widget toolbar to the idle
screen. You can position the widget anywhere
on the screen.
Change the widgets
1. In Menu mode, select Settings → Display and
light → Widget.
2. Select the widgets you want to include to the
widget toolbar and select Save.
• Some of your widgets connect to web
services. Selecting a web-based widget may
incur additional charges.
• Available widgets may vary depending on
your region or service provider.23
using basic functions
Access help information
Learn to access helpful information about your
phone.
1. Open the widget toolbar.
2. Select from the widget toolbar.
3. Rotate the phone anti-clockwise to landscape
view.
4. Select a help topic to learn about an application
or feature.
5. Scroll right or left to get more information. To
return to the previous level, select .
Customise your phone
Get more from your phone by customising it to
match your preferences.
Adjust the volume of the key tones
In Idle mode, press [ / ] and adjust the key tone
volume.
Adjust the vibration intensity on the
touch screen
You can adjust the intensity of the vibration when you
tap the phone screen.
1. In Idle mode, press [ / ].
2. Select Vibration and adjust the intensity of the
vibration.24
using basic functions
Switch to or from the silent profile
In Idle mode, select Keypad, and tap and hold to
silence or unsilence your phone.
Change your ringtone
1. In Menu mode, select Settings → Phone
profiles.
2. Select next to a profile you want.
3. Select Voice call ringtone.
4. Select a ringtone from the list and select Save.
5. Select Save.
Select a wallpaper (Idle mode)
1. In Menu mode, select Settings → Display and
light → Wallpaper.
2. Scroll left or right to an image.
3. Select Set.
Lock your phone
1. In Menu mode, select Settings → Security.
2. Select On under Phone lock.
3. Enter a new 4- to 8-digit password and select
Confirm.
4. Enter the new password again and select
Confirm.
Use basic call functions
Learn to make or answer calls and use basic call
functions.
The first time you access a menu that requires
a password, you will be prompted to create
and confirm a password.
During a call, your phone automatically locks
the touch screen to prevent accidental inputs.
To unlock, press the Hold key.25
using basic functions
Make a call
1. In Idle mode, select Keypad and enter an area
code and a phone number.
2. Tap → Voice call or press [ ] to dial the
number.
3. To end the call, press [ ].
Answer a call
1. When a call comes in, press [ ].
2. To end the call, press [ ].
Adjust the volume
To adjust the volume during a call, press [ / ].
Use the speakerphone feature
1. During a call, select Speaker → Yes to activate
the speaker.
2. To switch back to the earpiece, select Speaker.
Use the headset
By plugging the supplied headset into the phone,
you can make and answer calls:
• To redial the last call, press the headset button,
and then press again and hold.
• To answer a call, press the headset button.
• To end a call, press the headset button.
You can reject incoming calls by using the auto
rejection; in Menu mode, select Settings →
Application settings → Call → All calls →
Auto reject → On. Then set up the reject list
and select numbers to reject.
In noisy environment, you may have difficulty
hearing the calls while using the speakerphone
feature. For better audio performance, use the
normal phone mode.26
using basic functions
Send and view messages
Learn to send and view text (SMS), multimedia
(MMS), and email messages.
Send a text or multimedia message
1. In Menu mode, select Messages → Create
message → Message.
2. Select Tap to add recipient → Enter manually.
3. Enter a destination number and select Done.
4. Select Tap to add text.
5. Enter your message text and select Done.
X Enter text
For sending as a text message, skip to step 7.
For attaching multimedia, continue with step 6.
6. Select Add media and add an item.
7. Select Send to send the message.
Send an email
1. In Menu mode, select Messages → Create
message → Email.
2. Select Tap to add recipient → Enter manually.
3. Enter an email address and select Done.
4. Select Tap to add subject.
5. Enter a subject and select Done.
6. Select Tap to add text.
7. Enter your email text and select Done.
8. Select Add files → an item type and attach a file
(if necessary).
9. Select Send to send the message.
Enter text
With your phone’s touch screen, you can enter text
and create messages or notes.27
using basic functions
Change the text input method
When you open the text input field, the virtual keypad
appears. Select the Keypad drop-down menu and
select one of the following input methods for
entering text:
• Keypad
• Writing full sc.
• Writing box 1
• Writing box 2
Enter text using the virtual keypad
1. Change the text input method to Keypad.
2. Select the appropriate virtual key to enter text.
• To change case or use numbers or symbols,
select Abc.
• To enter text in T9 mode, select T9.
You can use the following text input modes:
Enter text using the handwriting full screen
1. Change the text input method to Writing full sc.
Mode Function
ABC
Select the appropriate virtual key until the
character you want appears on the display.
T9
1. Select the appropriate virtual keys to enter
an entire word.
2. When the word displays correctly, select
to insert a space. If the correct word
does not display, select an alternate word
from the list that appears.
Number
Select the appropriate virtual key to enter a
number.
Symbol
Select the appropriate virtual key to enter a
symbol.28
using basic functions
2. Write each character anywhere on the screen.
To change case or use numbers or symbols,
select Abc.
Enter text using the handwriting box1
1. Change the text input method to Writing box 1.
2. Write each character in the writing area at the
bottom of the screen.
Write numbers and symbols in the ?1 column at
the bottom right of the writing area.
Enter text using the handwriting box2
1. Change the text input method to Writing box 2.
2. Write each character in the writing area at the
bottom of the screen.
To change case or use numbers or symbols,
select Abc.
View text or multimedia messages
1. In Menu mode, select Messages → Inbox.
2. Select a text or multimedia message.
View an email
1. In Menu mode, select Messages → Email
inbox.
2. Select an account.
3. Select Download.
4. Select an email or a header.
5. If you selected a header, select Retrieve to view
the body of the email.29
using basic functions
Add and find contacts
Learn the basics of using the phonebook feature.
Add a new contact
1. In Idle mode, select Keypad and enter a phone
number.
2. Select → Add to Phonebook → New.
3. Select Phone or SIM.
4. Enter contact information.
5. Select Save to add the contact to memory.
Find a contact
1. In Menu mode, select Phonebook.
2. Select the search field, enter the letter of the
name you want to find, and select Done.
You can also drag to select the first letter of the
name.
3. Select the contact’s name from the search list.
Use basic camera functions
Learn the basics to capture and view photos and
videos.
Capture photos
1. In Idle mode, press the Camera key to turn on
the camera.
2. Rotate the phone anti-clockwise to landscape
view.
Once you have found a contact, you can:
• call the contact by selecting
• edit the contact information by selecting Edit
When you turn on the camera, the display may
appear blank due to temporary electrostatic
discharge. Try restarting the phone to solve the
problem.30
using basic functions
3. Aim the lens at the subject and make any
adjustments.
• To select the colour balance of the image, select
.
• To select the time delay, select .
• To set the brightness, select .
4. Press the Camera key to take a photo.
The photo is saved automatically.
After capturing photos, select to view photos
quickly.
View photos
1. In Menu mode, select My files → Images → My
photos → a photo file.
2. Rotate the phone anti-clockwise to landscape
view.
• Scroll up or down to view photos.
• Tap → or to zoom in or out. Press the
Back key to exit the zoom screen.
Capture videos
1. In Idle mode, press the Camera key to turn on
the camera.
2. Rotate the phone anti-clockwise to landscape
view.
3. Select to switch to Recording mode.
4. Aim the lens at the subject and make any
adjustments.
• To select the colour balance of the video, select
.
• To select the time delay, select .
• To set the brightness, select .
5. Press the Camera key to start recording.
6. Select or press the Camera key to stop
recording.
The video is saved automatically.
After capturing videos, select to view videos
quickly.31
using basic functions
View videos
In Menu mode, select My files → Videos → My
video clips → a video file.
Listen to music
Learn how to listen to music via the music player or
FM radio.
Listen to the FM radio
1. Plug the supplied headset into the phone’s
multifunction jack.
2. In Menu mode, select Applications → FM
radio.
3. Select Yes to start automatic tuning.
The radio scans and saves available stations
automatically.
4. Control the FM radio using the following icons:
The first time you access the FM radio, you will
be prompted to start automatic tuning.
Icon Function
Set your phone to re-tune frequencies for
stations
Change the sound output
Tune a radio station; Select a saved radio
station (tap and hold)
Start the FM radio
Turn off the FM radio32
using basic functions
Listen to music files
Start by transferring files to your phone or memory
card:
• Download from the wireless web. X p. 33
• Download from a PC with the optional Samsung
PC Studio. X p. 42
• Receive via Bluetooth. X p. 46
• Copy to your memory card. X p. 42
• Synchronise with Windows Media Player 11.
X p. 42
After transferring music files to your phone or
memory card,
1. In Menu mode, select Music → Music player.
2. Select a music category → a music file.
3. Control playback using the following icons:
Icon Function
Pause playback
Play playback
Skip backward; Scan backward in a file
(tap and hold)
Skip forward; Scan forward in a file (tap and
hold)
Select an equaliser type
Change the repeat mode
Activate Shuffle mode33
using basic functions
Browse the web
Learn to access and bookmark your favourite web
pages.
Browse web pages
1. In Menu mode, select Browser → Home to
launch your service provider’s homepage.
2. Navigate web pages using the following icons:
Bookmark your favourite web pages
1. In Menu mode, select Browser → Bookmarks.
2. Select Add.
3. Enter a page title and a web address (URL).
4. Select Save.
• You may incur additional charges for
accessing the web and downloading media.
• The browser menu may be labelled differently
depending on your service provider.
• Available icons may vary depending on your
region or service provider.
Icon Function
Move backward or forward on a web
page
Refresh the current web page
Return to the homepage
Open a list of saved bookmarks
Change the view mode
Access a list of browser options
Icon Function34
using advanced
functions
Learn how to perform advanced operations and use
additional features of your mobile phone.
Use advanced call functions
Learn about your phone’s additional calling
capabilities.
View and dial missed calls
Your phone will display calls you have missed on the
display. To dial the number of a missed call,
1. Select the missed call you want to dial from the
event alert widget.
2. Press [ ] to dial.
Call a recently dialled number
1. In Idle mode, press [ ] to display a list of recent
numbers.
2. Select to the number you want and select or
press [ ] to dial.35
using advanced functions
Hold a call or retrieve a held call
Select Hold to place a call on hold or select
Retrieve to retrieve a held call.
Dial a second call
If your network supports this function, you can dial
another number during a call:
1. Select Hold to place the first call on hold.
2. Select Keypad, enter the second number to
dial, and select New call or press [ ].
3. Select Swap to switch between the two calls.
4. To end the call on hold, select On hold → .
5. To end the current call, press [ ].
Answer a second call
If your network supports this function, you can
answer a second incoming call:
1. Press [ ] to answer the second call.
The first call is automatically placed on hold.
2. Select Swap to switch between the calls.
Make a multiparty call (conference call)
1. Call the first party you want to add to the
multiparty call.
2. While connected to the first party, call the
second party.
The first party is automatically placed on hold.
3. When connected to the second party, select
Join.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add more parties (if
necessary).36
using advanced functions
5. To end the multiparty call, press [ ].
Call an international number
1. In Idle mode, select Keypad and tap and hold 0
to insert the + character.
2. Enter the complete number you want to dial
(country code, area code, and phone number),
and then select → Voice call or press [ ]
to dial.
Call a contact from the phonebook
You can call numbers directly from the phonebook
using stored contacts. X p. 29
1. In Menu mode, select Phonebook.
2. Select the contact you want.
3. Select next to the number you want to dial →
.
Use advanced phonebook functions
Learn to create namecards, set speed dial numbers
and create groups of contacts.
Create a namecard
1. In Menu mode, select Phonebook → More →
My namecard.
2. Enter your personal details.
3. Select Save.
Set favourite numbers
1. In Menu mode, select Phonebook.
2. Select the Contacts drop-down menu →
Favourites.
You can send your namecard by attaching it to
a message or email or transferring it via the
Bluetooth wireless feature.37
using advanced functions
3. Select Add.
4. Select a contact.
The contact is saved to the favourite number.
Create a group of contacts
By creating groups of contacts, you can assign
group names, ringtones, caller ID photos, and
vibration type to each group or send messages and
emails to an entire group. Start by creating a group:
1. In Menu mode, select Phonebook.
2. Select the Contacts drop-down menu →
Groups.
3. Select Create group.
4. Set a group name, the caller ID photo, a group
ringtone, and vibration type.
5. Select Save.
Use advanced messaging functions
Learn to create and use templates to create new
messages, and create message folder.
Create a text template
1. In Menu mode, select Messages → Templates
→ Text templates.
2. Select Create to open a new template window.
3. Select the text input field.
4. Enter your text and select Done.
5. Select Save.
The first 5 favourite numbers will be assigned
to the favourite contacts ( ) on the widget
toolbar.38
using advanced functions
Create a multimedia template
1. In Menu mode, select Messages → Templates
→ Multimedia templates.
2. Select Create to open a new template window.
3. Create a multimedia message, with a subject
and desired attachments, to use as your
template. X p. 26
4. Select Save.
Insert text templates in new messages
1. To start a new message, in Menu mode, select
Messages → Create message → a message
type.
2. Select More → Insert → Text template → a
template.
Create a message from a multimedia
template
1. In Menu mode, select Messages → Templates
→ Multimedia templates.
2. Select the template you want.
3. Select Send.
Your template opens as a new multimedia
message.
Create a folder to manage messages
1. In Menu mode, select Messages → My folders.
2. Select Create folder.
3. Enter a new folder name and select Done.
Move messages from the Inbox to your folders to
manage them as your preferences.39
using advanced functions
Use advanced camera functions
Learn how to capture photos in various modes and
customise camera settings.
Capture photos by using options preset
for various scenes
1. Press the Camera key to turn on the camera.
2. Rotate the phone anti-clockwise to landscape
view.
3. Select → a scene → .
4. Make any necessary adjustments.
5. Press the Camera key to take a photo.
Capture a series of photos
1. Press the Camera key to turn on the camera.
2. Rotate the phone anti-clockwise to landscape
view.
3. Select → .
4. Make any necessary adjustments.
5. Press and hold the Camera key to take a series
of photos.
Capture panoramic photos
1. Press the Camera key to turn on the camera.
2. Rotate the phone anti-clockwise to landscape
view.
3. Select → .
4. Make any necessary adjustments.
5. Press the Camera key to take the first photo.40
using advanced functions
6. Slowly move the phone to the direction you
selected. The phone captures the next photo
automatically.
7. Repeat step 6 to complete the panoramic photo.
Capture photos in Smile shot mode
1. Press the Camera key to turn on the camera.
2. Rotate the phone anti-clockwise to landscape
view.
3. Select → .
4. Press the Camera key.
5. Aim the camera lens at your subject.
Your phone recognises people in an image and
detects their smiles. When the subject smiles,
the phone automatically takes a photo.
Capture divided photos
1. Press the Camera key to turn on the camera.
2. Rotate the phone anti-clockwise to landscape
view.
3. Select → .
4. Select an image layout.
5. Make any necessary adjustments.
6. Press the Camera key to take photos for each
segment.
Capture photos with decorative frames
1. Press the Camera key to turn on the camera.
2. Rotate the phone anti-clockwise to landscape
view.
3. Select → .
4. Select a frame.
5. Make any necessary adjustments.
6. Press the Camera key to take a photo with the
frame.41
using advanced functions
Use camera options
Before capturing a photo, select to access the
following options:
Before capturing a video, select to access the
following options:
Customise camera settings
Select → to access the following:
Option Function
Resolution Change the resolution option
Effects Apply a special effect
Exposuremeter Select a type of exposure metering
Image quality Set the quality of your digital images
Option Function
Resolution Change the resolution option
Effects Apply a special effect
Video quality Adjust the quality of your video clips
Setting Function
Guidelines Display the guidelines
Review
Set the camera to switch to the
preview screen after capturing
photos
Shutter sound
Select a sound to accompany the
shutter action
Audio recording Turn the audio on or off
Storage
Select a memory location to store
new images or video clips42
using advanced functions
Use advanced music functions
Learn to prepare music files, create playlists, and
store radio stations.
Copy music files via Samsung PC Studio
1. In Menu mode, select Settings → Phone
settings → PC connections → Samsung PC
studio → Save.
2. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the
multifunction jack on your phone to a PC.
3. Run Samsung PC Studio and copy files from the
PC to the phone.
Refer to the Samsung PC Studio help for more
information.
Copy music files to a memory card
1. Insert a memory card.
2. In Menu mode, select Settings → Phone
settings → PC connections → Mass storage
→ Save.
3. Press [ ] twice to return to Idle mode.
4. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the
multifunction jack on your phone to a PC.
When connected, a pop-up window will appear
on the PC.
5. Open the folder to view files.
6. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.
Synchronise your phone with Windows
Media Player
1. Insert a memory card.
2. In Menu mode, select Settings → Phone
settings → PC connections → Media player →
Save.43
using advanced functions
3. Press [ ] twice to return to Idle mode.
4. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the
multifunction jack on your phone to a PC with
Windows Media Player installed.
When connected, a pop-up window will appear
on the PC.
5. Open Windows Media Player to synchronise
music files.
6. Edit or enter your phone’s name in the pop-up
window (if necessary).
7. Select and drag the music files you want to the
sync list.
8. Start synchronisation.
Create a playlist
1. In Menu mode, select Music → Music player →
Playlists.
2. Select Create.
3. Select the text input field.
4. Enter a title for your new playlist and select
Done.
5. To assign an image to the playlist, select Tap to
edit and select an image or capture a new
photo.
6. Select Save.
7. Select the new playlist.
8. Select Add → Tracks.
9. Select the files you want to include and select
Add.
Customise your music player settings
1. In Menu mode, select Music → Music player.
2. Select Settings.44
using advanced functions
3. Adjust the settings to customise your music
player.
4. Select Save.
Store radio stations automatically
1. Plug the supplied headset into the phone’s
multifunction jack.
2. In Menu mode, select Applications → FM
radio.
3. Select More → Self-tuning.
4. Select Yes to confirm (if necessary).
The radio scans and saves available stations
automatically.
Find information of music
Learn to access an online music service and get
information about the songs you hear while on the
move.
1. In Menu mode, select Music → Find music.
2. Select Find music to connect to the server.
3. When your phone is successfully registered,
select to record a part of music you want to
find.
Option Function
Background
playing
Set whether to play music in the
background when you end the
music player
Music menu
Select music categories to display in
the music library screen
Some service providers may not support this
service and the database may not have
information for all songs.45
using tools and
applications
Learn how to work with your mobile phone’s tools
and additional applications.
Use the Bluetooth wireless feature
Learn about your phone’s ability to connect to other
wireless devices for exchanging data and using
hands-free features.
Turn on the Bluetooth wireless feature
1. In Menu mode, select Applications →
Bluetooth.
2. Select the circle in the centre to turn on the
Bluetooth wireless feature.
3. To allow other devices to locate your phone,
select Settings → On under My phone’s
visibility → a visibility option → Save → Save.
If you selected Custom, set duration that your
phone is visible.46
using tools and applications
Find and pair with other Bluetoothenabled devices
1. In Menu mode, select Applications →
Bluetooth → Search.
2. Select and drag a device icon into the centre.
3. Enter a PIN for the Bluetooth wireless feature or
the other device’s Bluetooth PIN, if it has one,
and select Done.
When the owner of the other device enters the
same PIN or accepts the connection, pairing is
complete.
Send data using the Bluetooth wireless
feature
1. Select the file or item from one of your phone’s
applications that you want to send.
2. Select Send via or Send URL via → Bluetooth.
Receive data using the Bluetooth
wireless feature
1. Enter the PIN for the Bluetooth wireless feature
and select OK (if necessary).
2. Select Yes to confirm that you are willing to
receive data from the device (if necessary).
Use Remote SIM mode
In Remote SIM mode, you can make or answer calls
only with a connected Bluetooth hands-free car kit
via the SIM card on your phone.
You may not need to enter a PIN depending on
the device.47
using tools and applications
To activate Remote SIM mode,
1. In Menu mode, select Applications →
Bluetooth → Settings.
2. Select On under Remote SIM mode.
3. Select Save.
To use Remote SIM mode, start the Bluetooth
connection from a Bluetooth hands-free car kit.
Activate and send an SOS message
When you have an emergency, you can send an
SOS message asking for help.
1. In Menu mode, select Messages → SOS
messages → Sending options.
2. Select On to turn on the SOS messaging
feature.
3. Select the recipient field to open the recipient list.
4. Select Contacts to open your contact list.
5. Select the contacts you want and select Add.
6. Select a phone number (if necessary).
7. Select OK to save the recipients.
8. Select the Once drop-down menu and set the
number of times to repeat the SOS message.
9. Select Save → Yes.
To send an SOS message, the touch screen and
keys must be locked. Press [ / ] four times.
The Bluetooth hands-free car kit must be
authorised. To authorise, select the device and
select Authorise device.
This feature may be unavailable depending on
your region or service provider.
Once you send an SOS message, all phone
functions will be suspended until you press the
Hold key.48
using tools and applications
Activate the mobile tracker
When someone inserts a new SIM card in your
phone, the mobile tracker feature will automatically
send the contact number to two recipients to help
you locate and recover your phone. To activate the
mobile tracker,
1. In Menu mode, select Settings → Security →
Mobile tracker.
2. Enter your password and select Confirm.
3. Select On to turn on the mobile tracker.
4. Select the recipient field to open the recipient list.
5. Select the recipient input field.
6. Enter a phone number and select Done.
7. Select OK to save the recipients.
8. Select the sender input field.
9. Enter the sender’s name and select Done.
10.Select Save → Accept.
Make fake calls
You can simulate fake incoming calls when you want
to get out of meetings or unwanted conversations.
You can also make it appear as if you are talking on
the phone by playing back a recorded voice.
Record a voice
1. In Menu mode, select Settings → Application
settings → Call → Fake call → Fake call voice.
2. Select On under Fake call voice.
3. Select Voice recording.
4. Select to start recording.
5. Speak into the microphone.
6. When you are finished speaking, select .49
using tools and applications
7. Press the Back key.
8. Select Save.
Make a fake call
To make a fake call, press and hold [ ] in Idle
mode.
To change the delay time before fake calls, in Menu
mode, select Settings → Application settings →
Call → Fake call → Fake call timer → an option →
Save.
Record and play voice memos
Learn to operate your phone’s voice recorder.
Record a voice memo
1. In Menu mode, select Applications → Voice
recorder.
2. Select to start recording.
3. Speak your memo into the microphone.
4. When you are finished speaking, select .
Your memo is saved automatically.
Play a voice memo
1. In Menu mode, select My files → Sounds →
Voice clips.
2. Select a file.
3. Control the playback using the following icons:
Icon Function
Pause playback
Play or resume playback
Scan backward in a file (tap and hold)
Scan forward in a file (tap and hold)50
using tools and applications
Edit images
Learn to edit images and apply fun effects.
Apply effects to images
1. In Menu mode, select My files → Images → My
photos → a photo file.
2. Select .
3. Select Edit → Effects → an effect option (filter,
style, warp, or partial blur).
4. Select a variation of the effect to apply and select
Done.
To apply a blur effect to a specific area of an
image, move or resize the rectangle and select
Blur → Done.
5. When you are finished with applying effects,
select Files → Save as.
6. Select a memory location (if necessary).
7. Enter a new file name for the image and select
Done.
Adjust an image
1. Open an image to be edited. Refer to steps 1-2
of “Apply effects to images”.
2. Select Edit → Adjust → an adjustment option
(brightness, contrast, or colour).
To adjust the image automatically, select Auto
level.
3. Adjust the image as desired and select Done.
4. Save the edited image with a new file name.
Refer to steps 5-7 of “Apply effects to images”.51
using tools and applications
Transform an image
1. Open an image to be edited. Refer to steps 1-2
of “Apply effects to images”.
2. Select Edit → Transform → Resize, Rotate, or
Flip.
3. Rotate or flip the image as desired and select
Done.
To resize the image, select a size and select
Save → Done.
4. Save the edited image with a new file name.
Refer to steps 5-7 of “Apply effects to images”.
Crop an image
1. Open an image to be edited. Refer to steps 1-2
of “Apply effects to images”.
2. Select Edit → Crop.
3. Draw the rectangle over the area you want to
crop and select Crop → Done.
4. Save the edited image with a new file name.
Refer to steps 5-7 of “Apply effects to images”.
Insert a visual feature
1. Open an image to be edited. Refer to steps 1-2
of “Apply effects to images”.
2. Select Edit → Insert → a visual feature (frame,
image, clip art, emoticon, or text).
3. Select a visual feature or enter text and select
Done.
4. Move or resize the visual feature and select
Done.
5. Save the edited image with a new file name.
Refer to steps 5-7 of “Apply effects to images”.52
using tools and applications
Add a memo by handwriting
1. Open an image to be edited. Refer to steps 1-2
of “Apply effects to images”.
2. Select Edit → Memo on screen.
3. Select a colour and write a memo on the screen
and select Done.
4. Save the edited image with a new file name.
Refer to steps 5-7 of “Apply effects to images”.
Print images
Learn to print your image with a USB connection or
the Bluetooth wireless feature.
To print an image using a USB connection,
1. Connect the multifunction jack on your phone to
a compatible printer.
2. Open an image. X p. 30
3. Select More → Print via → USB.
4. Set print options and print the image.
To print an image using the Bluetooth wireless
feature,
1. Open an image. X p. 30
2. Select More → Print via → Bluetooth.
3. Select a Bluetooth-enabled printer and pair with
the printer. X p. 46
4. Set print options and print the image.
Upload photos and videos to the
web
Learn to post your photos and videos to photo
sharing websites and blogs.
Communities may be unavailable depending
on your region or service provider.53
using tools and applications
Set your favourite destination list
1. In Menu mode, select Communities.
2. Select Yes to set your favourite destination list (if
necessary).
3. Select Accept to confirm that you agree to the
general disclaimer.
4. Select the destinations you want to add and
select Save.
If you selected Update blog lists, new
destination sites are added to the list
automatically.
Upload a file
To upload photos and videos, you must have
accounts of photo sharing websites and blogs.
1. In Menu mode, select Communities.
2. Select a destination you want to post to.
3. Enter the user ID and password of the
destination.
4. Select Tap to add and select a media file.
5. Enter the post details and select Upload.
The first time you access Communities, you
will be prompted to confirm.
To edit the favourite destination list or update
the lists, from the Communities screen, select
Settings → Preferred lists → Edit.54
using tools and applications
Use Java-powered games and
applications
Learn to use games and applications powered by
award-winning Java technology.
Download games or applications
1. In Menu mode, select Applications → Games
and more → More games.
Your phone connects to the website preset by
your service provider.
2. Search for a game or application and download it
to the phone.
Play games
1. In Menu mode, select Applications → Games
and more.
2. Select a game from the list and follow the
onscreen instructions.
Launch applications
1. In Menu mode, select Applications → Games
and more → an application.
2. Select More to access a list of various options
and settings for your application.
The download of java files may not be
supported depending on the software of the
phone.
Available games may vary depending on your
service provider or region. Game controls and
options may vary.55
using tools and applications
Synchronise data
Learn to synchronise contacts, calendar events,
tasks, and memos with the web server you have
specified.
Create a synchronisation profile
1. In Menu mode, select Applications →
Synchronise.
2. Select Add and specify profile parameters.
3. When you are finished, select Save.
Start synchronisation
1. In Menu mode, select Applications →
Synchronise.
2. Select a synchronisation profile.
3. Select Continue to start synchronisation with the
web server you have specified.
Use RSS reader
Learn to use RSS reader to get the latest news and
information from your favourite websites.
Add an RSS feed address
1. In Menu mode, select Applications → RSS
reader.
2. Select Add.
3. Select the URL input field.
4. Enter the address of an RSS feed and select
OK.
Read RSS feeds
1. In Menu mode, select Applications → RSS
reader.
2. Select Update to get the latest contents.56
using tools and applications
3. Select a feed category → an updated feed.
Create and view world clocks
Learn to view the time in another region and set
world clocks to appear on your display.
View a world clock
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → World
clock.
2. Scroll through the world map and select a time
zone you want.
Create a world clock
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → World
clock.
2. Select → Add.
3. Select a time zone.
4. To set daylight saving time, select .
5. Select OK to create your world clock.
The world clock is set as the second clock.
6. Select Add to add more world clocks (step 3).
Add a world clock to your display
With the dual clock widget, you can view clocks with
two different time zones on your display.
After you have created a world clock,
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → World
clock.
The auto update feature sets the phone to
automatically update the RSS feeds at the
specified interval. You can activate the auto
update feature by selecting RSS reader →
More → Settings → Preferences.57
using tools and applications
2. Select → Set as 2nd clock.
3. Select the world clock you want to add.
4. Select Set.
Set and use alarms
Learn to set and control alarms for important events.
Set a new alarm
1. In Menu mode, select Alarms.
2. Select Create alarm.
3. Set alarm details.
4. Select Save.
Stop an alarm
When the alarm sounds,
• Drag the slider to Stop to stop an alarm without
snooze.
• Drag the slider to Stop to stop an alarm with
snooze or drag the slider to Snooze to silence the
alarm for the snooze period.
Deactivate an alarm
1. In Menu mode, select Alarms.
2. Select Off next to the alarm you want to
deactivate.
The auto power-up feature sets the phone to
automatically turn on and sound the alarm at
the designated time if the phone is turned off.58
using tools and applications
Use the calculator
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → Calculator.
2. Use the keys that correspond to the calculator
display to perform basic mathematical
operations.
Convert currencies or
measurements
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → Convertor
→ a conversion type.
2. Enter the currencies or measurements and units
in the appropriate fields.
Set a countdown timer
1. In Menu mode, select Applications → Timer.
2. Enter hours or minutes to count down.
3. Select Start to begin the countdown.
4. When the timer expires, drag the slider to Stop
to stop the alerts.
Use the stopwatch
1. In Menu mode, select Applications →
Stopwatch.
2. Select Start to begin the stopwatch.
3. Select Lap to record lap times.
4. When you are finished, select Stop.
5. Select Reset to clear recorded times.
Create a new task
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → Task.
2. Select Create task.
3. Enter the details of the task and select Save.59
using tools and applications
Create a text memo
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → Memo.
2. Select Create memo.
3. Enter your memo text and select Done.
Manage your calendar
Learn to change the calendar view and create
events.
Change the calendar view
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → Calendar.
2. Select More → View by day or View by week.
Create an event
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → Calendar.
2. Select Create schedule.
3. Enter the details of the event as required.
4. Select Save.
View events
To view events of a specific date,
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → Calendar.
2. Select a date on the calendar.
3. Select an event to view its details.
To view events by event types,
1. In Menu mode, select Organiser → Calendar.
2. Select Schedule list.
3. Select an event to view its details.a
troubleshooting
If you are having trouble with your mobile phone, try these troubleshooting procedures before contacting a service
professional.
While using your phone, the following messages
may appear:
Message Try this to solve the problem:
Insert SIM
card to
access
network
services
Ensure that the SIM card is installed
correctly.
Phone lock
When the phone lock feature is
enabled, you must enter the
password you set for the phone.
PIN code
When using the phone for the first
time or when the PIN requirement is
enabled, you must enter the PIN
supplied with the SIM card. You can
disable this feature by using the PIN
lock menu.
PIN2 code
When you access a menu requiring
the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2
supplied by the SIM card. For
details, contact your service
provider.
Message Try this to solve the problem:b
troubleshooting
Your phone displays “Service unavailable” or
“Network error.”
• When you are in areas with weak signals or poor
reception, you may lose reception. Move to
another area and try again.
• You cannot access some options without a
subscription. Contact your service provider for
more details.
You enter a number, but the call is not dialled.
• Ensure that you have pressed the Dial key: [ ].
• Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular
network.
• Ensure that you have not set call barring for the
phone number.
Another caller cannot reach you.
• Ensure that your phone is turned on.
• Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular
network.
• Ensure that you have not set call barring for the
phone number.
Another caller cannot hear you speaking.
• Ensure that you are not covering the built-in
microphone.
• Ensure that the microphone is close to your
mouth.
• If using a headset, ensure that it is properly
connected.
PUK code
Your SIM card is blocked, usually as
a result of entering your PIN
incorrectly several times. You must
enter the PUK supplied by your
service provider.
Message Try this to solve the problem:c
troubleshooting
The phone beeps and the battery icon flashes.
Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery to
continue using the phone.
The audio quality of the call is poor.
• Ensure that you are not blocking the phone’s
internal antenna.
• When you are in areas with weak signals or poor
reception, you may lose reception. Move to
another area and try again.
You select a contact to call, but the call is not
dialled.
• Ensure that the correct number is stored in the
contact list.
• Re-enter and save the number, if necessary.
The battery does not charge properly or
sometimes the phone turns itself off.
• The battery terminals may be dirty. Wipe both
gold-coloured contacts with a clean, soft cloth
and try charging the battery again.
• If the battery will no longer charge completely,
dispose of the old battery properly and replace it
with a new battery.
Your phone is hot to the touch.
When you use several applications at once, your
phone requires more power and may heat up.
This is normal and should not affect your phone’s
lifespan or performance.d
index
alarms
creating, 57
deactivating, 57
stopping, 57
battery
charging, 18
installing, 16
low battery indicator, 18
Bluetooth
activating, 45
receiving data, 46
remote SIM mode, 46
sending data, 46
browser
see web browser
calculator
see tools, calculator
calendar
see tools, calendar
calls
advanced functions, 34
answering additional calls, 35
answering, 25
basic functions, 24
dialling additional calls, 35
dialling missed calls, 34
from the phonebook, 36
international numbers, 36
making fake calls, 48
making, 25
multiparty, 35
placing on hold, 35
recently dialled, 34
retrieving held calls, 35
viewing missed, 34
clock
see world clock
Communities
see tool, mobile blog
conference calls
see calls, multipartye
index
contacts
adding, 29
creating groups, 37
finding, 29
converter
see tools, convertor
countdown timer
see tools, countdown timer
fake calls
see calls, making fake calls
FM radio
listening to, 31
storing station, 44
headset 25
images
adding memos, 52
adjusting, 50
applying effects, 50
cropping, 51
inserting visual features, 51
printing, 52
transforming, 51
internet
see web browser
Java
accessing applications, 54
downloading, 54
launching games, 54
key tones 23
lock
see phone lock
memo
see text or voice memos
memory card 19
messages
sending email, 26
sending multimedia, 26
sending text, 26
viewing email, 28
viewing multimedia, 28
viewing text, 28
mobile tracker 48
multimedia
see messages
music finding 44
music player
creating playlists, 43
customising, 43
listening to music, 32
synchronising, 42f
index
namecards 36
offline profile 20
phone lock 24
photos
advanced capturing, 39
basic capturing, 29
editing, 50
viewing, 30
radio
see FM radio
ringtone 24
RSS reader
see tools, RSS reader
silent profile 24
SIM card 16
SOS message 47
stopwatch
see tools, stopwatch
synchronisation
creating a profile, 55
starting, 55
templates
inserting, 38
multimedia, 38
text, 37
text
creating memos, 59
entering, 26
messages, 26
timer
see tools, countdown timer
tools
alarm, 57
calculator, 58
calendar, 59
convertor, 58
countdown timer, 58
image editor, 50
mobile blog, 52
RSS reader, 55
stopwatch, 58
task, 58
videos
basic capturing, 30
viewing, 31
voice memos
playing, 49
recording, 49g
index
volume
call volume, 25
key tone volume, 23
wallpaper 24
web browser
adding bookmarks, 33
launching homepage, 33
widgets 22
Windows Media Player 42
world clock
creating, 56
setting dual display, 56
viewing, 56Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE)
We, Samsung Electronics
declare under our sole responsibility that the product
GSM Mobile Phone : GT-S5230
to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the following
standards and/or other normative documents.
SAFETY EN 60950- 1 : 2001 +A11:2004
EMC EN 301 489- 01 V1.6.1 (09-2005)
EN 301 489- 07 V1.3.1 (11-2005)
EN 301 489- 17 V1.2.1 (08-2002)
SAR EN 50360 : 2001
EN 62209-1 : 2006
RADIO EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003)
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006)
We hereby declare that [all essential radio test suites have been carried
out and that] the above named product is in conformity to all the
essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC.
The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10 and
detailed in Annex[IV] of Directive 1999/5/EC has been followed with the
involvement of the following Notified Body(ies):
BABT, Balfour House, Churchfield Road,
Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK*
Identification mark: 0168
The technical documentation kept at :
Samsung Electronics QA Lab.
which will be made available upon request.
(Representative in the EU)
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way,
Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK*
2009.04.01 Yong-Sang Park / S. Manager
(place and date of issue) (name and signature of authorised person)
* It is not the address of Samsung Service Centre. For the address or the
phone number of Samsung Service Centre, see the warranty card or contact
the retailer where you purchased your phone.Some of the contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your
service provider.
World Wide Web
http://www.samsungmobile.com
Printed in Korea
Code No.:GH68-22882A
English (EU). 04/2009. Rev. 1.1
BASIC
User’s Guide
ML-216x Series
ML-216xW Series
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and
troubleshooting on windows.
ADVANCED
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and
troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.2
BASIC
1. Introduction
Key benefits 4
Features by models 6
Useful to know 8
About this user’s guide 9
Safety information 10
Machine overview 15
Control panel overview 18
Turning on the machine 20
Installing the driver locally 21
Reinstalling the driver 22
2. Learning the Basic Usage
Printing a demo page 24
Media and tray 25
Basic printing 34
3. Maintenance
Ordering supplies and accessories 38
Available supplies 39
Available maintenance parts 40
Storing the toner cartridge 41
Redistributing toner 43
Replacing the toner cartridge 44
Cleaning the machine 46
Tips for moving & storing your machine 49
4. Troubleshooting
Tips for avoiding paper jams 51
Clearing paper jams 52
Understanding the status LED 55
5. Appendix
Specifications 59
Regulatory information 68
Copyright 781. Introduction
This chapter provides information you need to know before using the machine.
• Key benefits 4
• Features by models 6
• Useful to know 8
• About this user’s guide 9
• Safety information 10
• Machine overview 15
• Control panel overview 18
• Turning on the machine 20
• Installing the driver locally 21
• Reinstalling the driver 22Key benefits
Environmentally friendly
• To save toner and paper, this machine supports the Eco feature (see "Easy
Eco Driver" on page 159).
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper (see
"Using advanced print features" on page 141).
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (manual doublesided printing) (see "Using advanced print features" on page 141).
• To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
Print with excellent quality and speed
• You can print with a resolution of up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi effective output.
• Fast, on-demand printing.
- For single-side printing, 20 ppm (A4) or 21 ppm (Letter).
Convenience
• Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you
captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard (see "Understanding
Easy Capture Manager" on page 160).
• Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Samsung Printer Status (or Smart Panel)
are a program that monitors and informs you of the machine’s status and
allows you to customize the machine’s settings (see "Using Samsung Easy
Printer Manager" on page 164).
• AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the
screen more easily than when you use the ordinary program (see "Samsung
AnyWeb Print" on page 158).
• Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the
latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available
only for Windows OS users.
• If you have Internet access, you can get help, support application, machine
drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads.Key benefits
Wide range of functionality and application support
• Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 61).
• Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as
“Confidential” (see "Using advanced print features" on page 141).
• Print posters: The text and pictures of each page of your document are
magnified and printed across the multiple sheets of paper and can then be
taped together to form a poster (see "Using advanced print features" on
page 141).
• You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on
page 64).
• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface.
Supports various wireless network setting method
• Using the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) button
- You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on the
machine and the access point (a wireless router).
• Using the USB cable or a network cable
- You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB
cable or a network cable.
• Using the Wi-Fi Direct
- You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi-Fi or WiFi Direct feature.
See "Introducing wireless set up methods" on page 105.Features by models
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.
Operating System
Software
Operating System ML-216x Series ML-216xW Series
Windows ● ●
Macintosh ● ●
Linux ● ●
Unix
Software ML-216x Series ML-216xW Series
PCL printer driver
SPL printer driver ● ●
PS printer driver
XPS printer driver
a
a. For XPS driver, it is only supported for windows through the Samsung website (www.samsung.com)
● ●
Samsung Easy Printer Manager ● ●
SyncThru™ Web Service ●Features by models
Variety feature
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Features ML-216x Series ML-216xW Series
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ● ●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN ●
IPv6 ●
Eco printing(Easy Eco Driver)
a
a. Setting the ECO settings is available from the windows driver.
● ●
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) ●
Manual duplex (2-sided) printing ● ●Useful to know
Where can I download the machine’s driver?
•Visit www.samsung.com/printer to download the latest
machine’s driver, and install it on your system.
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?
•Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer.
•Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region to
view product service information.
The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.
•Turn the product off and on again.
•Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and
troubleshoot accordingly (see "Understanding the status LED"
on page 55).
A paper jam has occurred.
•Open and close the top cover (see "Front view" on page 16).
•Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this
manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing paper
jams" on page 52).
Printouts are blurry.
•The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner
cartridge.
•Try a different print resolution setting.
•Replace the toner cartridge.
The machine does not print.
•Open the print queue list and remove the document from the list
(see "Canceling a print job" on page 35).
•Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver
locally" on page 21).
•Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows.1. Introduction 9
About this user’s guide
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the
machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage.
• Read the safety information before using the machine.
• If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting
chapter.
• Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter.
• All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or model you purchased.
• The screenshots in this user's guide may differ from your machine
depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.
• The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.
1
Conventions
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
• Document is synonymous with original.
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
• Machine refers to printer or MFP.
2
General icons
Icon Text Description
Caution
Gives users information to protect the machine from
possible mechanical damage or malfunction.
Note
Provides additional information or detailed
specification of the machine function and feature.1. Introduction 10
Safety information
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and
others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read
and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading
this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
3
Important safety symbols
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter
4
Operating environment
Warning
Warning
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe
personal injury or death.
Caution
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor
personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is
not grounded.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or
heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
This could result in electric shock or fire.
• If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes
strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off
the power switch and unplug the machine.
• The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of
emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy
object could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the
plug with wet hands.
This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information
1. Introduction 11
Caution
5
Operating method
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,
remove the power plug from the electrical outlet.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
Burns could occur.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and
request assistance from qualified service personnel.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions
have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could
result in electric shock.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet.
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
It can cause damage to the machine.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper
tray.
You may get injured.
This machine's power reception device is the power cord.
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the
electrical outlet.
Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper
output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch.
Burns can occur.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal
objects.
It can damage the machine.Safety information
1. Introduction 12
6
Installation / Moving
Warning
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray.
Caution
It can damage the machine.
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
This could result in elevated component temperatures which can
cause damage or fire.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water
leaks.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all
cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the
units weight.
If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting, do
not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use the appropriate
amount of people to left the device safety.
Then lift the machine:
• If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person.
• If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift
with 2 people.
• If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or
more people.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Use only No.26 AWG
a
or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.Safety information
1. Introduction 13
7
Maintenance / Checking
Caution
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6
feet) with a 110 V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or
larger.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result
in electric shock or fire.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock
or fire.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
The machine should be connected to
the power level which is specified on the label.
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using,
contact the electrical utility company.
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the
machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or
cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.
You could get injured.
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.
Children could get hurt.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself.
It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the
machine needs repairing.Safety information
1. Introduction 14
8
Supply usage
Caution
• Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
• Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service
technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in
fire or electric shock.
• The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician.
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide
provided with the machine.
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser
unit.
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away
from children.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
it.
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the
machine.
In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service
fee will be charged.1. Introduction 15
Machine overview
9
Accessories
Power cord Quick installation guide Output stacker
a
a. Refer to the Quick Install Guide to attach the output stacker to the machine.
Software CD
b
b. The software CD contains the printer drivers and software applications.
Misc. accessories
c
c. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model.Machine overview
1. Introduction 16
10
Front view
• This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 6).
1 Control panel 3 Tray 5 Output support 7 Toner cartridge
2 Tray handle 4 Output tray 6 Top cover
2
4
3
5Machine overview
1. Introduction 17
11
Rear view
• This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 6).
1 USB port 2 Power receptacle
1
21. Introduction 18
Control panel overview
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model.
There are various types of control panels.
1 Toner
LED
Shows the status of the toner (see "Status LED" on page 56).
2
(Status
LED)
Shows the status of your machine (see "Status LED" on page 56).
1
2
3
4
3
(WPS)
Configures the wireless network connection easily without a
computer (see "Wireless network setup" on page 104).
• Configuration sheet
- Press and hold this button for about 10 seconds until the
green LED blinks slowly, and release.
• Prints supplies info report / error report
- Press and hold this button for about 15 seconds until the
green LED on, and release.
• Manual print
- Press this button each time you load a sheet of paper in the
tray if you have selected Manual Feeder for Source in your
printer driver.Control panel overview
1. Introduction 19
3
(Print
screen)
• Prints the screen
- Press this button and the green LED will start blinking. If you
want to print only the active screen, release the button
when the green LED stops blinking. If you want to print the
whole screen, release the button while it’s blinking.
• Print Screen can only be used in the Windows and
Macintosh operating systems.
• You can only use this function with USB-connected
machine.
• When printing the active window/whole monitor
screen using the print screen button, the machine may
use more toner depending on what is being printed.
• You can only use this function if the machine’s Easy
Printer Manager program is installed if you are a
macintosh OS user, you need to enable Screen Print
Settings from the Easy Printer Manager to use the
Print Screen feature.
• Configuration sheet
- Press and hold this button for about 10 seconds until the
green LED blinks slowly, and release.
• Prints supplies info report / error report
- Press and hold this button for about 15 seconds until the
green LED on, and release.
• Manual print
- Press this button each time you load a sheet of paper in the
tray if you have selected Manual Feeder for Source in your
printer driver.
4
(Power)
You can turn the power off or wake the machine up from the
sleep mode with this button.1. Introduction 20
Turning on the machine
1
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first.
2
press (power) on the control panel.
If you want to turn the power off, press (power) on the control panel.
1
21. Introduction 21
Installing the driver locally
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer
using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following
steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver (see
Advanced Guide).
• If you are a Macintosh or Linux OS user, refer to the "Software installation"
on page 82.
• The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the
machine and interface in use.
• Selecting Custom Installation allows you to choose which programs to
install.
• Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).
12
Windows
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears during the installation
procedure, click Cancel to close the window.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window
will appear.
3
Select Install Now.
4
Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License
Agreement. Then, click Next.
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.1. Introduction 22
Reinstalling the driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall
the driver.
13
Windows
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall.
3
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
4
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver
again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 21).2. Learning the Basic Usage
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would
like to set or change values. This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup
options.
• Printing a demo page 24
• Media and tray 25
• Basic printing 342. Learning the Basic Usage 24
Printing a demo page
Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly (Windows only).
To print a demo page:
• Open the Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 35) > Samsung tab > Demo page2. Learning the Basic Usage 25
Media and tray
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your
machine.
• Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
warranty or service agreements.
• Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could
cause damage to the machine.
• Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.
• Use designated print media (see "Print media specifications" on page
61).
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may
lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire.
1
Tray overview
To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guide.
If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew,
or jamming of the paper.
1 Paper width guide
2 Tray
2
1Media and tray
2. Learning the Basic Usage 26
2
Loading paper in the tray
1 Open the tray. Then, adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading
(see "Tray overview" on page 25).
2
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading papers.
3
Place the paper with the side you want to print facing up and
open the output tray.
2
1
1
2Media and tray
2. Learning the Basic Usage 27
4
Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the paper stack
without causing it to bend.
• Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp.
• Do not use a paper with a leading-edge curl, it may cause a paper jam or
the paper can be wrinkled.
• If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.
5 When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the tray (see
"Setting the paper size and type" on page 33).
The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the
control panel.
a To print in application, open an application and start the print menu.
b Open Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 35).
c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate
paper type.
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label.
d Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK.
e Start printing in application.Media and tray
2. Learning the Basic Usage 28
3
Manual feeding in the tray
The manual feeder can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as
postcards, note cards, and envelopes (see "Print media specifications" on page
61).
Tips on using the manual feeder
• Load only one type, size and weight of print media at time in the manual
feeder.
• If you select Paper > Source > Manual Feeder for the paper source in
your software application, you need to press (Print screen) or
(WPS) button each time you print a page and load only one type,
size and weight of print media at a time on the manual tray.
• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still
paper in the manual feeder.
• Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the
manual feeder first and be placed in the center of the tray.
• To ensure printing quality and to prevent paper jams, only load the
available paper (see "Print media specifications" on page 61).
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them
into the manual feeder.
• When printing on special media, you must follow the loading guidelines
(see "Printing on special media" on page 28).
• When the machine is in a power save mode, the machine does not feed
paper from the manual feeder. Wake up the machine by pressing the
power button before using the manual feeder.
4
Printing on special media
The table below shows the special media usable in each tray.Media and tray
2. Learning the Basic Usage 29
The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. To get the higest
printing quality, select the proper media type from the Printing Preferences
window > Paper tab > Paper Type (see "Opening printing preferences" on page
35).
For example, if you want to print on labels, select Labels for Paper Type.
When using special media, we recommend you feed one sheet at a time (see
"Print media specifications" on page 61).
To see for paper weights for each sheet, refer to "Print media specifications" on
page 61.
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Envelope
Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.
Types Tray
a
Plain ●
Thick ●
Thin ●
Bond ●
Color ●
CardStock ●
Labels ●
Envelope ●
Preprinted ●
Cotton ●
Recycled ●
Archive ●
a. The paper types available manual feeding in tray.
Types Tray
aMedia and tray
2. Learning the Basic Usage 30
To print an envelope, place it as shown in the following figure.
If you select Envelope from the Printing Preferences window, but the printed
images get easily erased, select Thick Envelope and try printing again.
However, this might cause some noise when printing.
• When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
-Weight: should not exceed 90 g/m2
otherwise; jams may occur.
-Construction: should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not
contain air.
-Condition: should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.
-Temperature: should resist the heat and pressure of the machine during
operation.
• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-creased folds.
• Do not use stamped envelopes.
• Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, selfadhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the
corner of the envelope.
1 Acceptable
2 Unacceptable
• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C (338 °F)). The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
• For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the
edges of the envelope.
• Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
1 2Media and tray
2. Learning the Basic Usage 31
Labels
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser
printers.
• When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
-Adhesives: Should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature. Check
your machine’s specifications to view the fusing temperature (about
170°C (338°F)).
-Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.
Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
-Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
-Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of
separation.
• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine
components.
• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.
• Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled,
bubbled, or otherwise damaged.Media and tray
2. Learning the Basic Usage 32
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper
• In the software application, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away
from the edges of the material.
Preprinted paper
When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.
• Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or
release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C (338°F)).
• Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely
affect machine rollers.
• Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing
print quality.Media and tray
2. Learning the Basic Usage 33
5
Setting the paper size and type
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type.
Open the Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page
35) and set the paper size and type in the Paper tab.
If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing paper, select Custom
in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing
preferences" on page 35).2. Learning the Basic Usage 34
Basic printing
For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Using
advanced print features" on page 141).
6
Printing
If you are a Macintosh or Linux user, refer to the "Macintosh printing" on
page 151 or "Linux printing" on page 153.
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7.
1 Open the document you want to print.
2
Select Print from the File menu.
3
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
4
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range
are selected within the Print window.
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or
Preferences from the Print window (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 35).
5
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.Basic printing
2. Learning the Basic Usage 35
7
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
• You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
( ) in the Windows task bar.
8
Opening printing preferences
• The Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may
differ depending on the machine in use. However, the composition of
the Printing Preferences window is similar.
• When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a
warning mark or . An mark means you can select that certain
option but it is not recommended, and an mark means you cannot
select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
1 Open the document you want to print.
2
Select Print from the file menu.
3
Select your machine from the Select Printer.
4
Click Properties or Preferences.
You can check the machine's current status using the Printer Status button
(see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 167).Basic printing
2. Learning the Basic Usage 36
Using a favorite setting
The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the
Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use.
To save a Presets item, follow these steps:
1
Change the settings as needed on each tab.
2
Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.
3
Click (Add). When you save Presets, all current driver settings are
saved.
Select more options and click (Update), settings will be added to the
Presets you made. To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets dropdown list. The machine is now set to print according to the settings you
have selected. To delete saved settings, select it from the Presets dropdown list and click (Delete).
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting
Default Preset from the Presets drop-down list.
9
Using help
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and
press F1 on your keyboard.
10
Eco printing
The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage. The Eco function
allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly printing.
To Eco Printing, click the below:
See "Easy Eco Driver" on page 159.3. Maintenance
This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your
machine.
• Ordering supplies and accessories 38
• Available supplies 39
• Available maintenance parts 40
• Storing the toner cartridge 41
• Redistributing toner 43
• Replacing the toner cartridge 44
• Cleaning the machine 46
• Tips for moving & storing your machine 493. Maintenance 38
Ordering supplies and accessories
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts.
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine.
You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service.3. Maintenance 39
Available supplies
When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the following types of supplies for your machine:
Depending on the options, percentage of image area, and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise, new toner
cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific
country conditions.
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine
Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine’s
warranty.
Type Average yield
a
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
Part name
Toner cartridge Approx. 1,500 pages MLT-D101S3. Maintenance 40
Available maintenance parts
To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the machine. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service
provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it has reached its
“Average yield”.
Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below. The purpose of which
is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met.
Parts Average yield
a
a. It will be affected by the operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media type, media size and job
complexity.
Fuser unit Approx. 30,000 pages
Transfer roller Approx. 30,000 pages
Feed roller Approx. 30,000 pages
Pickup roller Approx. 30,000 pages3. Maintenance 41
Storing the toner cartridge
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to ensure
optimal performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.
Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used. This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge
should remain in its original and unopened package until installation – if original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and
store in a dark cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from
the printer, follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge properly.
• Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package.
• Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if it were installed in the machine.
• Do not store consumables in any of the following conditions:
-Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
-Humidity range less than 20% and greater than 80%.
-An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
-Direct sunlight or room light.
-Dusty places.
-A car for a long period of time.
-An environment where corrosive gases are present.
-An environment with salty air.Storing the toner cartridge
3. Maintenance 42
1
Handling instructions
• Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge.
• Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
• Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can
cause internal damage and toner spillage.
2
Toner cartridge usage
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung
brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or
remanufactured toner cartridges.
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused
by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner
cartridges.
3
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life the life of the toner cartridge (or imaging unit) yield
depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield
may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media type and/or
media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the
toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often.3. Maintenance 43
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
• White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density variation side to side.
• The Toner LED blinks orange.
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still
occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
• Before opening the top cover, close the output support first.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
1
23. Maintenance 44
Replacing the toner cartridge
• Before opening the top cover, close the output support first.
• Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
• Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly, it will increase the initial print quality.
• Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. Replacing the toner cartridge
3. Maintenance 45
When a toner cartridge has reached the end of life, the machine will stop printing.3. Maintenance 46
Cleaning the machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing
condition and use your machine longer.
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the
cabinet.
• If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum
cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.
• During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner
specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.
4
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.
5
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks
or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.Cleaning the machine
3. Maintenance 47
• Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine.
• If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine.
• Before opening the top cover, close the output support first.
1
2Cleaning the machine
3. Maintenance 48
6
Cleaning the pickup roller
• Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine.
• If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine.3. Maintenance 49
Tips for moving & storing your machine
• When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to
the machine or reduce print quality.
• When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely. 4. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
• Tips for avoiding paper jams 51
• Clearing paper jams 52
• Understanding the status LED 55
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
If your machine has a display screen, check the message on the display screen first to solve the
error. If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer to the
Troubleshooting chapter in the Advanced User's Guide (see "Troubleshooting" on page 174).
If you cannot find a solution in the User's Guide or the problem persists, call for service. 4. Troubleshooting 51
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:
• Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 25).
• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
• Do not mix paper types in a tray.
• Use only recommended print media (see "Print media specifications" on page 61).4. Troubleshooting 52
Clearing paper jams
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.
1
In trayClearing paper jams
4. Troubleshooting 53
2
Inside the machine
• The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
• Before opening the top cover, close the output support first.Clearing paper jams
4. Troubleshooting 54
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:4. Troubleshooting 55
Understanding the status LED
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.
• Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country.
• To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part.
• You can also resolve the error with the guidelines from the Samsung Printer Status window or Smart Panel program window.
• If the problem persists, call a service representative.Understanding the status LED
4. Troubleshooting 56
3
Status LED
Status Description
(Status
LED)
Off The machine is off-line or save mode.
Green
Blinking
• When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine is receiving data from the computer.
• When the backlight blinks rapidly, the machine is printing data.
On The machine is on-line and can be used.
Red
Blinking Waiting for a (Print screen) button to be pressed for manual printing.
On
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.
• There is no paper in the tray when receiving or printing data. Load paper in the tray ("Loading paper in the tray" on
page 26).
• The machine has stopped due to a major error.
Orange
Blinking Upgrading firmware.
On A paper jam has occurred (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 52).Understanding the status LED
4. Troubleshooting 57
4
Toner LED/ WPS LED
Status Description
(Toner LED)
Orange
Blinking
Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for
replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see "Redistributing toner"
on page 43).
On
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life
a
. It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 44).
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages
may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer
stops printing.
Off All toner cartridges are at normal capacity.
(WPS LED)
b
b. Wireless model only (see "Features by models" on page 6).
Blue
Blinking The machine is connecting to a wireless network.
On The machine is connected to a wireless network (see "Using the WPS button" on page 107).
Off The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.
(Power LED)
Blue
On The machine is in power save mode.
Off The machine is in ready mode or the machine’s power is off.5. Appendix
This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations.
• Specifications 59
• Regulatory information 68
• Copyright 785. Appendix 59
Specifications
1
General specifications
The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information.
Items Description
Dimension Width x Length x Height 332 x 215 x 178 mm (13.07 x 8.46 x 7.01 inches)
Weight Machine with consumables 4.95 kg (10.91 lbs)
Noise Level
a
Ready mode Less than 26 dB (A)
Print mode Less than 50 dB (A)
Temperature Operation 10 to 32°C (50 to 90°F)
Storage (packed) -20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F)
Humidity Operation 10 to 80% RH
Storage (packed) 20 to 95% RH
Power rating
b 110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models AC 220 - 240 VSpecifications
5. Appendix 60
Power consumption
Average operating mode Less than 310W
Ready mode Less than 30 W
Power save mode Less than 0.9 W (ML-216x Series), Less than 1.2 W (ML-216xW Series)
Power off mode Less than 0.45 W (0.1 Wc
)
Wireless
d Module T77H262 / SPW-B4319S
a. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
b. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and type of current (A) for your machine.
c. For the machine that has a power switch.
d. Wireless model only (see "Features by models" on page 6).
Items DescriptionSpecifications
5. Appendix 61
2
Print media specifications
Type Size Dimensions
Print media weight/Capacity
a
Tray Manual feeding in tray
b
Plain paper
Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
71 to 85 g/m2
(19 to 23 lbs
bond)
• 150 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs
bond)
71 to 85 g/m2
(19 to 23 lbs bond)
Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) • 1 sheet
US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)
Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)
Envelope
Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs
bond)
• 10 sheets
75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond)
Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches) • 1 sheet
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)Specifications
5. Appendix 62
Thick paper
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
86 to 120 g/m2
(23 to 32 lbs
bond)
• 50 sheets of 120 g/m2
(32 lbs
bond)
86 to 120 g/m2
(23 to 32 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet
Thin paper
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
60 to 70 g/m2
(16 to 19 lbs bond)
• 160 sheets of 60 g/m2
(16 lbs
bond)
60 to 70 g/m2
(16 to 19 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet
Cotton
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond)
• 150 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs
bond)
75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet
Colored
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond)
• 150 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs
bond)
75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet
Pre-printed
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond)
• 150 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs
bond)
75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet
Recycled
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section
60 to 90 g/m2
(16 to 24 lbs bond)
• 150 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs
bond)
60 to 90 g/m2
(16 to 24 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet
Type Size Dimensions
Print media weight/Capacity
a
Tray Manual feeding in tray
bSpecifications
5. Appendix 63
Labels
c
Letter, Legal, Oficio,
US Folio, A4, JIS B5,
ISO B5, Executive,
A5
Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m2
(32 to 40 lbs
bond)
• 10 sheets
120 to 150 g/m2
(32 to 40 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet
Card stock
Letter, Legal, Oficio,
US Folio, A4, JIS B5,
ISO B5, Executive,
A5,
Postcard 4x6
Refer to the Plain paper section 121 to 163 g/m2
(32 to 43 lbs
bond)
• 10 sheets
121 to 163 g/m2
(32 to 43 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet
Bond paper
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section • 10 sheets • 1 sheet
Archive
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section • 100 sheets • 1 sheet
Minimum size (custom) 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
60 to 163 g/m2
(16 to 43 lbs bond)
Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
b. Feed one sheet at a time.
c. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.
Type Size Dimensions
Print media weight/Capacity
a
Tray Manual feeding in tray
bSpecifications
5. Appendix 64
3
System requirements
Microsoft® Windows®
Operating system
Requirement (recommended)
CPU RAM free HDD space
Windows® 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128 MB) 600 MB
Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1.5 GB
Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB
Windows Server® 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2 GB) 10 GB
Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1 GB) 15 GB
Windows® 7
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server® 2008 R2 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) 512 MB (2 GB) 10 GBSpecifications
5. Appendix 65
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.
• Users who have administrator rights can install the software.
• Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
• For Windows 2000, Services Pack 4 or higher is required.
Macintosh
Operating system
Requirements (Recommended)
CPU RAM Free HDD space
Mac OS X 10.4
• Intel® processors
• PowerPC G4/ G5
• 128 MB for a powerPC based Mac
(512 MB)
• 512 MB for an Intel-based Mac (1 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.5
• Intel® processors
• 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/
G5
512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X 10.6 • Intel® processors 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X 10.7 • Intel® processors 2 GB 4 GBSpecifications
5. Appendix 66
Linux
Items Requirements
Operating system
Fedora 5~13 (32/ 64 bit)
OpenSuSE® 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64 bit)
SuSE 10.1 (32 bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64 bit)
Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit)
Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)
Redhat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)
CPU Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM 512 MB (1 GB)
Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB)Specifications
5. Appendix 67
4
Network environment
Network and wireless models only (see "Features by models" on page 6).
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
Items Specifications
Network interface • 802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN
Network operating system
• Windows 2000/Server 2003 /Server 2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.7
• Unix
Network protocols
• TCP/IPv4
• DHCP, BOOTP
• DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)
Wireless security
• Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK)
• Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES5. Appendix 68
Regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with
several regulatory statements.
5
Laser safety statement
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-
1 : 2007.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above
a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service
condition.
Warning
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from
laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage
your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
6
Ozone safety
This product's ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because
ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good
ventilation.Regulatory information
5. Appendix 69
7
Power saver
8
Recycling
9
China only
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology
that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of
time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S.
marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://
www.energystar.gov
For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENERGY STAR label will be
on your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR
certified.
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an
environmentally responsible manner.Regulatory information
5. Appendix 70
10
Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)
(Applicable in the european union and other
european countries with separate collection
systems)
The United States of America only
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest
recycling location, go to our website:www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call,
(877) 278 - 0799
11
Radio frequency emissions
FCC information to the user
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of
their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these
items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to
promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they
purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe
recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.Regulatory information
5. Appendix 71
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Canadian radio interference regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and
Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le
matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et
Sciences Canada.
12
United states of america
Federal communications commission (FCC)
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present
(embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these
devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless
devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the
United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label.Regulatory information
5. Appendix 72
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches)
from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless
device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the
RF exposure limits as set by the FCC.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.
Contact manufacturer for service.
FCC statement for wireless LAN use:
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination
the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain
a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device
cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
13
Russia only
14
Germany onlyRegulatory information
5. Appendix 73
15
Turkey only
16
Replacing the fitted plug (for UK only)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug
and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit
the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost
the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable.
However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug
sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded
plug.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you
plug it into a socket.
Important warning:
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do
the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E”
or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or
colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”
or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral
• Brown: LiveRegulatory information
5. Appendix 74
17
Declaration of conformity (European countries)
Approvals and Certifications
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of
the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of
the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced
standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
representative.
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network
(PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed
to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European
countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application
of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European
Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document
(EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure
network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed
against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained
in this document.
• Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [ML-216x Series]
is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC
Directive (2004/108/EC).
• Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [ML-216xW
Series] is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at
www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter
your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC. Regulatory information
5. Appendix 75
European radio approval information (for products
fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This
section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label
to verify the presence of wireless devices.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European
Commission through the R&TTE directive.
European states qualified under wireless approvals:
EU countries
European states with restrictions on use:
EU
In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2454-2483.5 MHz for devices
above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless
EEA/EFTA countries
No limitations at this time
18
Regulatory compliance statements
Wireless guidance
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present
(embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview
of considerations while operating a wireless device.
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in
the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in
your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio
Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the
wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for
requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be
allowed.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because
the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less
energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use.
Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact
during normal operation.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only
qualified for use in the European Union or associated
areas if a CE mark with a Notified Body Registration
Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.Regulatory information
5. Appendix 76
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8
inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of
common restrictions are listed below:
19
Israel only
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment
on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless
devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also
known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices are
examples of devices that provide wireless communication.
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or
services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen
or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of
wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments
where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the
applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the
wireless device.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices.
Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio
Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the
use of a wireless device in the destination country.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless
device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields
are in place and the system is fully assembled.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use
it. Contact manufacturer for service.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be
used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.Regulatory information
5. Appendix 77
20
China only5. Appendix 78
Copyright
© 2011 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
• Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• TrueType, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.
REV. 1.1ADVANCED
User’s Guide
ML-216x Series
ML-216xW Series
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration,
operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting
on windows.80
ADVANCED
1. Software installation
Installation for Macintosh 83
Reinstallation for Macintosh 84
Installation for Linux 85
Reinstallation for Linux 87
2. Using a network-connected
machine
Useful network programs 89
Wired network setup 90
Installing driver over the network 93
IPv6 configuration 101
Wireless network setup 104
Samsung MobilePrint 136
3. Special features
Altitude adjustment 138
Changing the default print settings 139
Setting your machine as a default machine 140
Using advanced print features 141
Using Direct Printing Utility (Windows only) 149
Using memory/hard drive features 150
Macintosh printing 151
Linux printing 153
Unix printing 155
4. Useful management tools
Samsung AnyWeb Print 158
Easy Eco Driver 159
Understanding Easy Capture Manager 160
Using SyncThru™ Web Service 161
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 164
Using Samsung Printer Status 167
Using Smart Panel 169
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator 171
5. Troubleshooting
Paper feeding problems 175
Power and cable connecting problems 176
Printing problems 17781
ADVANCED
Printing quality problems 181
Operating system problems 1891. Software installation
This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the
machine is connected via a cable. A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using
the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network
connected machine’s driver (see Installing driver over the network93).
• Installation for Macintosh 83
• Reinstallation for Macintosh 84
• Installation for Linux 85
• Reinstallation for Linux 87
• If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the "Installing the driver locally" on page 21 for
installing the machine’s driver.
• Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches).1. Software installation 83
Installation for Macintosh
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
5
Click Continue.
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
8 When the message that warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
9
Click Continue on the User Options Pane.
10
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
11
Enter the password and click OK.
12
Installing software requires you to restart your computer. Click Continue
Installation.
13
After the installation is finished, click Close.
14 Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
•For Mac OS X 10.5 -10.7, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
15
Click Add on the Printer List.
•For Mac OS X 10.5 -10.7, click the “+” folder icon; a display window will
pop up.
16
Click Default Browser and find the USB connection.
•For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, click Default and find the USB connection.
17
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung
in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
•For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default
machine.
18
Click Add.1. Software installation 84
Reinstallation for Macintosh
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3 Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Uninstaller OS X icon.
5
Enter the password and click OK.
6 When the uninstall is done, click OK.
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility
or Print & Fax.1. Software installation 85
Installation for Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
1
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2 When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
3
From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package
to your computer.
4
Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package.
5 Double click cdroot > autorun.
6 When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
7 When the installation is complete, click Finish.
The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon
and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you
have any difficulties, consult the on-screen help that is available through your
system menu or from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified
Driver Configurator or Image Manager.
2
Installing the Smart Panel
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2 When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
3
From the Samsung website, download the Smart Panel package to your
computer.
4
Right-click the Smart Panel package and extract the package.
5 Double click cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh.Installation for Linux
1. Software installation 86
3
Installing the Printer Settings Utility
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2 When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
3
From the Samsung website, download the Printer Settings Utility
package to your computer.
4
Right-click the Printer Settings Utility package and extract the
package.
5 Double click cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh.1. Software installation 87
Reinstallation for Linux
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2 When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
3
Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen
appears, type in the following.
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
4
Click Uninstall.
5
Click Next.
6
Click Finish.2. Using a networkconnected machine
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software.
• Useful network programs 89
• Wired network setup 90
• Installing driver over the network 93
• IPv6 configuration 101
• Wireless network setup 104
• Samsung MobilePrint 136
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model (see "Features by
models" on page 6).2. Using a network-connected machine 89
Useful network programs
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing
several machines on the network is possible.
• Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by models" on page 6).
1
SyncThru™ Web Service
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the
following tasks (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 103):
• Check the supplies information and status.
• Customize machine settings.
• Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine
status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain
person's email automatically.
• Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to
various network environments.
2
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing
network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network
machines from any site with corporate internet access.
• Download this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com.
3
SetIP
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
• See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)" on page 90.
• See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Macintosh)" on page 91.
• See "IPv4 configuation using SetIP (Linux)" on page 92.
• The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not
be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 17).
• TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.2. Using a network-connected machine 90
Wired network setup
You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your
network.
You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on
your machine.
• For models that do not have the display screen on the control panel, use the
SyncThru™ Web Service or SetIP program.
-See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 161.
-See "Setting IP address" on page 90.
• For models that have the display screen on the control panel, configure the
network setting by pressing (Menu) button > Network on the control
panel.
4
Printing a network configuration report
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel
that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set
up a network.
• The machine has the display screen: Press the (Menu) button on the
control panel and select Network > Network Config. (Network
Configuration)> Yes.
• The machine does not have the display screen: Press the (Cancel or
Stop/Clear) button for more than five seconds on the control panel.
• The machine without the (Cancel or Stop/Clear) button: Press the
(WPS) button formore than ten seconds on the control panel.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine’s MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
• MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78
• IP Address: 165.254.192.192
5
Setting IP address
• The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not
be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 17)
• TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements.
In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control
Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.Wired network setup
2. Using a network-connected machine 91
1
Install this program from the supplied CD-ROM by double-click
Application > SetIP > Setup.exe.
2
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
3
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
4
Turn on the machine.
5
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
6
Click the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP
configuration window.
7
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information
assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 90) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
8
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Macintosh)
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences > Security > Firewall.
The following instructions may differ for your model.
1
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2
Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.
3 Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows the
printer’s name and IP address information. Wired network setup
2. Using a network-connected machine 92
4
Click the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
IP configuration window.
5
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 90) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
6
Select Apply, then OK, and OK again.
7 Quit Safari.
IPv4 configuation using SetIP (Linux)
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences or Administrator.
The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems.
1 Open /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.
2 Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file.
3
Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
4
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 90) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
5
The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration
Report. 2. Using a network-connected machine 93
Installing driver over the network
• The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not
be able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 17).
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending
on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 6).
6
Windows
1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 90).
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears during the installation
procedure, click Cancel to close the window.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window
will appear.
3
Select Install Now.
The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and
choose individual components to install. Follow the instructions on the
window.
4
Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License
Agreement. Then, click Next.
The program searches for the machine.Installing driver over the network
2. Using a network-connected machine 94
If your machine is not found on the network or locally, an error message
appears. Select the option you want and click Next.
5
The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you
wish to use and click OK.
If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window appears.
6
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Silent installation Mode
Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user
intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software
are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the silent installation
by typing /s or /S in the command window.
Command-line Parameters
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window.
Following command-line are effective and operated when command is
used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be
operated solely.
Command- line Definition Description
/s or
/S
Starts silent installation. Installs machine drivers
without prompting any UIs
or user intervention.
/p”” or
/P””
Specifies printer port.
Network Port will
be created by use
of Standard TCP/
IP Port monitor.
For local port, this
port must exist on
system before
being specified
by command.
Printer port name can be
specified as IP address,
hostname, USB local port
name or IEEE1284 port
name.
For example
• /p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in
where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
means IP address for
network printer. /
p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”, /
p”hostname”
• When installing the driver
silently in Korean, type inSetup.exe /s /
L"0x0012”.Installing driver over the network
2. Using a network-connected machine 95
/a”” or
/A””
Specifies destination path
for installation.
The destination
path should be a
fully qualified
path.
Since machine drivers
should be installed on the OS
specific location, this
command applies to only
application software.
/i”